1 #LyX 2.3 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
56 \maintain_unincluded_children false
58 \language_package default
61 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
62 \font_sans "lmss" "default"
63 \font_typewriter "lmtt" "default"
64 \font_math "auto" "auto"
65 \font_default_family default
66 \use_non_tex_fonts false
69 \font_sf_scale 100 100
70 \font_tt_scale 100 100
72 \use_dash_ligatures false
74 \default_output_format pdf2
76 \bibtex_command bibtex
77 \index_command default
81 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
82 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
86 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
87 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
88 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
93 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
94 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
97 \use_package amsmath 1
98 \use_package amssymb 1
101 \use_package mathdots 1
102 \use_package mathtools 1
103 \use_package mhchem 1
104 \use_package stackrel 1
105 \use_package stmaryrd 1
106 \use_package undertilde 1
108 \cite_engine_type default
112 \paperorientation portrait
117 \notefontcolor #0000ff
134 \paragraph_separation skip
137 \math_numbering_side default
138 \quotes_style english
142 \paperpagestyle default
143 \tracking_changes false
144 \output_changes false
158 by the \SpecialChar LyX
163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
165 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
166 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
167 Documentation mailing list:
168 \begin_inset CommandInset href
170 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
182 \begin_inset Newline newline
186 \begin_inset Newline newline
190 \begin_inset Note Note
193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
194 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
195 \begin_inset Newline newline
200 https://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/Manuals#UserGuide
208 \begin_layout Standard
209 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
210 LatexCommand tableofcontents
217 \begin_layout Chapter
221 \begin_layout Section
222 What is \SpecialChar LyX
226 \begin_layout Standard
228 is a document preparation system.
229 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
230 scripts, publishable books, business
231 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
232 It is unlike most other
233 \begin_inset Quotes eld
237 \begin_inset Quotes erd
240 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
242 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
243 \begin_inset Quotes eld
247 \begin_inset Quotes erd
251 \begin_inset Quotes eld
255 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
258 pt type, left justified, 5
259 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
263 \begin_inset Quotes erd
268 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
272 \begin_layout Standard
273 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
278 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
282 \begin_layout Standard
287 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
288 's philosophy: most importantly,
289 the format of all of the manuals.
290 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
291 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
297 manual describes that, too.
300 \begin_layout Section
305 \begin_layout Standard
306 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
307 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
309 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
310 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
314 \begin_layout Standard
315 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
316 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
317 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
319 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
320 only a vertical scrollbar.
321 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
322 The first case is large images.
323 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
324 image and use the option
335 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
338 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
339 this doesn't work for equations yet.
342 \begin_layout Standard
343 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
344 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
350 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
352 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
359 \begin_layout Section
363 \begin_layout Standard
364 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
366 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
368 Just select the manual you want to read from the
375 \begin_layout Section
376 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
378 \begin_inset CommandInset label
380 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
387 \begin_layout Standard
388 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
389 can be configured via the menu
391 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
395 \begin_inset Index idx
398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
405 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
407 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
408 packages are available.
409 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
411 Although this configuration has already been done when \SpecialChar LyX
413 your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
414 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
418 \begin_inset space \space{}
421 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
422 classes, and which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
424 To force \SpecialChar LyX
425 to re-inspect your system, you should use
427 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
431 \begin_inset Index idx
434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
435 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
441 You should then restart \SpecialChar LyX
442 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
445 \begin_layout Section
448 \begin_inset CommandInset label
450 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
457 \begin_layout Standard
458 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
459 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
460 installed, but you will not be
461 able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it installed.
462 However, some \SpecialChar LyX
463 documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
464 PDFs and the like, and every \SpecialChar LyX
465 document can always be output as plain text
469 \begin_layout Standard
470 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
471 or DocBook classes or packages.
472 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
473 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
476 \begin_layout Standard
477 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
478 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
479 has found on your system are listed in a file you can
482 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
490 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
491 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
494 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
498 \begin_inset Index idx
501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
502 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
510 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
517 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
521 \begin_layout Chapter
522 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
526 \begin_layout Section
527 Basic File Operations
528 \begin_inset Index idx
531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
540 \begin_layout Standard
545 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
546 in addition to some more advanced operations:
549 \begin_layout Itemize
571 \begin_layout Itemize
587 arg "buffer-new-template"
593 \begin_layout Itemize
615 \begin_layout Itemize
625 \begin_layout Itemize
639 \begin_layout Itemize
661 \begin_layout Itemize
673 arg "buffer-write-as"
679 \begin_layout Itemize
693 \begin_layout Itemize
707 \begin_layout Standard
708 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
709 a few minor differences.
712 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
723 command lists the available templates.
724 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
725 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
726 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
732 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
734 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
741 \begin_layout Standard
742 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
751 \begin_inset Quotes eld
755 \begin_inset Quotes erd
759 \begin_inset Quotes eld
763 \begin_inset Quotes erd
767 \begin_inset Quotes eld
771 \begin_inset Quotes erd
774 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
775 to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank space
776 is just that — a big, blank space.
784 \begin_layout Standard
805 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
810 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
813 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
831 will reload the document from disk.
832 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
833 and want to restore it to the last save.
842 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
843 them as your changes.
846 \begin_layout Section
847 Basic Editing Features
848 \begin_inset Index idx
851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
858 \begin_inset CommandInset label
860 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
867 \begin_layout Standard
868 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
869 can perform cut and paste operations
870 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
871 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
872 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
873 editing features and how to access
875 We will start with cut and paste.
878 \begin_layout Standard
879 As you might expect, the
883 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
884 various other editing features.
885 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
889 \begin_layout Itemize
895 \begin_inset Index idx
898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
927 \begin_layout Itemize
933 \begin_inset Index idx
936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
965 \begin_layout Itemize
971 \begin_inset Index idx
974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
999 \begin_layout Itemize
1003 \begin_inset space ~
1009 \begin_layout Itemize
1013 \begin_inset space ~
1019 \begin_layout Itemize
1023 \begin_inset space ~
1027 \begin_inset space ~
1033 \begin_inset Index idx
1036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1045 \begin_inset Index idx
1048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1063 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1073 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1079 \begin_layout Standard
1080 The first three are self-explanatory.
1081 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1082 and other programs by
1103 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1104 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1109 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1110 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1111 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1112 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1113 into individual cells.
1117 \begin_inset space ~
1122 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1123 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1127 \begin_layout Standard
1131 \begin_inset space ~
1136 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1138 These include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1140 \begin_inset space ~
1147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1153 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1154 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1155 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1157 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1161 \begin_inset space \space{}
1164 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1165 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1168 \begin_inset space ~
1171 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1173 \begin_inset space ~
1177 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1181 \begin_inset space ~
1190 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1191 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1193 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1197 \begin_inset space ~
1202 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1203 start a new paragraph.
1204 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1205 a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1210 \begin_inset space ~
1213 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1215 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1219 \begin_inset space ~
1227 \begin_inset space ~
1230 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1233 paste from the primary selection.
1234 This is normally the currently selected text.
1237 \begin_layout Standard
1240 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1242 \begin_inset space ~
1246 \begin_inset space ~
1254 \begin_inset space ~
1258 \begin_inset space ~
1264 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1270 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1273 \begin_inset space ~
1282 \begin_inset space ~
1287 button to skip the current word.
1291 \begin_inset space ~
1296 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1300 \begin_inset space ~
1305 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1307 If the toggle is set, searching for
1308 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1316 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1319 will not match the word
1320 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1328 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1334 Match whole words only
1336 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1337 to only find complete words, e.
1338 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1342 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1350 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1354 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1362 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1367 offers also an advanced
1370 \begin_inset space ~
1374 \begin_inset space ~
1379 feature that is described in section
1380 \begin_inset space ~
1384 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1386 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1393 \begin_layout Standard
1394 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1395 \begin_inset space \space{}
1399 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1403 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1407 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1409 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1414 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1421 \begin_layout Standard
1425 arg "inset-select-all"
1428 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1429 When the cursor is inside an inset
1432 arg "inset-select-all"
1435 selects the content of the inset.
1439 arg "inset-select-all"
1442 consecutively will increase the selection to the whole inset and then to
1447 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1450 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1454 \begin_layout Section
1456 \begin_inset Index idx
1459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1466 \begin_inset Index idx
1469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1476 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1478 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1485 \begin_layout Standard
1486 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1488 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1491 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1494 or the toolbar button
1500 to undo some mistake.
1501 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1503 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1506 or the toolbar button
1513 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1517 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1520 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1521 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1524 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1527 \begin_layout Standard
1528 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1530 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1534 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1537 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1538 This is a consequence of the 100
1539 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1542 step undo limit mentioned above.
1545 \begin_layout Standard
1554 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1556 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1560 \begin_layout Section
1562 \begin_inset Index idx
1565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1574 \begin_layout Standard
1575 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1578 \begin_layout Enumerate
1583 \begin_layout Itemize
1588 once anywhere in the edit window.
1589 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1593 \begin_layout Enumerate
1598 \begin_layout Itemize
1605 marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1608 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1611 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1612 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1615 \begin_layout Itemize
1616 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1619 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1626 \begin_layout Enumerate
1627 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1631 \begin_layout Standard
1632 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1633 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1637 \begin_layout Section
1639 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1641 name "sec:Navigating"
1646 \begin_inset Index idx
1649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1658 \begin_layout Standard
1660 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1663 \begin_layout Itemize
1668 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1669 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1672 \begin_layout Itemize
1673 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1675 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1677 \begin_inset space ~
1682 or by the toolbar button
1685 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1691 \begin_layout Itemize
1692 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1694 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1697 and use the same menu to return to them.
1698 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1701 \begin_layout Standard
1705 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1710 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1711 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1713 \begin_inset space ~
1718 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1719 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1720 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1721 your last editing position.
1724 \begin_layout Standard
1729 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1733 \begin_layout Subsection
1735 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1737 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1742 \begin_inset Index idx
1745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1746 Navigating ! Outline
1752 \begin_inset Index idx
1755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1764 \begin_layout Standard
1765 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1766 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1767 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1769 \begin_inset space ~
1773 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1775 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1779 ), or notes, or citations (see section
1780 \begin_inset space ~
1784 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1786 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1791 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1795 \begin_layout Standard
1796 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1797 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1798 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1799 dialog and to modify the citation.
1802 \begin_layout Standard
1807 field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear in the outline.
1808 For example, if you are displaying the list of
1810 Labels and References
1812 and wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1814 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1818 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1821 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1824 \begin_layout Standard
1825 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1826 you further to control the display.
1831 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1832 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1838 option keeps it in the current view state.
1839 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1840 \begin_inset space ~
1843 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1844 \begin_inset space ~
1847 3, the subsections of sections
1848 \begin_inset space ~
1851 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1856 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1857 \begin_inset space ~
1861 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1863 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1867 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1871 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1874 \begin_layout Standard
1881 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1882 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1896 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1897 So, for example, you can move section
1898 \begin_inset space ~
1902 \begin_inset space ~
1905 2.4 or after section
1906 \begin_inset space ~
1911 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1924 (or the corresponding key bindings
1932 ) you can change the level of sections.
1933 So you can for example make section
1934 \begin_inset space ~
1938 \begin_inset space ~
1942 \begin_inset space ~
1948 \begin_layout Standard
1949 By right-clicking on a section in the outliner you can select the whole
1950 section to copy, cut or delete it.
1953 \begin_layout Subsection
1954 Horizontal Scrolling
1955 \begin_inset Index idx
1958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1959 Navigating ! Horizontal Scrolling
1967 \begin_layout Standard
1969 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because the standard output page formats
1971 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1975 \begin_inset space \space{}
1979 \begin_inset space ~
1982 A4 are less wide than PC or laptop screens.
1983 Therefore you will get troubles in the output of your document if document
1984 parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
1988 \begin_layout Standard
1989 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
1993 \begin_layout Itemize
1995 is used on a small tablet computer
1998 \begin_layout Itemize
1999 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
2003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2011 \begin_inset space ~
2024 \begin_layout Itemize
2025 Math constructs with long command names
2028 \begin_layout Standard
2029 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2030 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor
2032 As example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2033 windows so that table
2034 \begin_inset space ~
2038 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2040 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2045 You will now see a dotted red line at the right or the left side of the
2047 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys
2048 to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2051 \begin_layout Standard
2052 \begin_inset Float table
2058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2059 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2062 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2064 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2068 Horizontal scrolling test.
2076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2078 \begin_inset Tabular
2079 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2080 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2081 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2082 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2083 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2085 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2094 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2103 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2125 \begin_layout Section
2126 Input/Word Completion
2127 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2129 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2134 \begin_inset Index idx
2137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2144 \begin_inset Index idx
2147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2178 \begin_layout Standard
2180 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2182 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2183 is used to propose completions.
2186 \begin_layout Standard
2187 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2190 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2195 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2202 \begin_inset space ~
2206 \begin_inset space ~
2211 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2215 \begin_inset space ~
2220 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2221 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2225 \begin_inset space ~
2231 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2232 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2233 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2234 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2237 \begin_layout Standard
2239 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2240 completions available.
2245 key to accept a proposed completion.
2246 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2247 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2248 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2255 \begin_layout Standard
2256 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2257 ing options for text.
2258 The special math option
2262 enables characters to be composed.
2263 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2264 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2267 , you can then input the characters
2268 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2276 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2279 to a formula to get it.
2280 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2281 of the math toolbar.
2282 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2286 that is in \SpecialChar LyX
2287 's installation folder.
2288 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2297 \begin_layout Section
2299 \begin_inset Index idx
2302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2309 \begin_inset Index idx
2312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2341 \begin_inset Index idx
2344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2375 \begin_layout Standard
2376 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2390 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2393 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2397 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
2398 \begin_inset space ~
2402 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2404 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2411 \begin_layout Standard
2415 \begin_inset space ~
2423 \begin_inset space ~
2444 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2448 \begin_layout Labeling
2449 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2453 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2454 LatexCommand nomenclature
2456 description "Tabulator key"
2463 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2465 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2466 \begin_inset space ~
2470 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2472 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2477 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2479 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2483 , especially section
2484 \begin_inset space ~
2488 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2490 reference "subsec:Lists"
2496 If you are still confused, look in the
2501 \begin_inset Newline newline
2509 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2510 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2514 \begin_layout Labeling
2515 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2519 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2520 LatexCommand nomenclature
2522 description "Escape key"
2530 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2534 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2537 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2538 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2541 \begin_layout Labeling
2542 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2548 \begin_inset space ~
2552 \begin_inset space ~
2559 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2560 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2564 \begin_layout Standard
2565 There are three modifier keys:
2568 \begin_layout Labeling
2569 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2575 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2583 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2587 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2588 LatexCommand nomenclature
2590 description "Control key"
2595 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2596 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2600 \begin_layout Itemize
2609 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2612 \begin_layout Itemize
2621 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2624 \begin_layout Itemize
2633 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2637 \begin_layout Labeling
2638 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2644 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2652 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2656 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2657 LatexCommand nomenclature
2659 description "Shift key"
2664 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2665 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2668 \begin_layout Labeling
2669 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2675 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2683 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2687 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2688 LatexCommand nomenclature
2690 description "Alt or Meta key"
2695 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2696 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2697 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2703 \begin_inset Newline newline
2706 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2708 menu accelerator keys
2711 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2712 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2716 \begin_layout Standard
2717 For example, the sequence
2718 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2724 \begin_inset space ~
2728 \begin_inset space ~
2734 \begin_inset space ~
2742 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2746 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2750 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2755 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2761 \begin_inset space ~
2767 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2777 \begin_layout Standard
2782 manual lists all other things bound to the
2790 \begin_layout Standard
2791 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2793 , because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at
2794 the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
2795 's main window which describes the name of the action you
2796 have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2797 The \SpecialChar LyX
2798 menus also list the defined key bindings.
2799 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2800 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2802 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2803 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2811 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2818 followed by a capital
2825 \begin_layout Chapter
2828 \begin_inset Index idx
2831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2841 \begin_layout Section
2843 \begin_inset Index idx
2846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2855 \begin_layout Subsection
2859 \begin_layout Standard
2860 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2861 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2862 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2863 numbering schemes, and so on.
2864 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2865 and format the title of your document differently.
2868 \begin_layout Standard
2873 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2874 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2875 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2876 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
2877 picks one for you by default.
2878 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2881 \begin_layout Subsection
2883 \begin_inset Index idx
2886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2893 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2895 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2902 \begin_layout Standard
2903 You can select a class using the
2905 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2906 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2910 \begin_inset Index idx
2913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2920 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2924 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2928 \begin_layout Standard
2929 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
2934 \begin_layout Description
2935 Article for basic articles
2938 \begin_layout Description
2939 Report for basic reports
2942 \begin_layout Description
2943 Book for writing a book
2946 \begin_layout Description
2947 Letter for US-style letters
2950 \begin_layout Standard
2951 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
2952 only uses if you have installed
2953 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
2954 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
2955 distributions will include
2957 Here are some of the classes.
2958 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2960 Special Document Classes
2969 \begin_layout Description
2970 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2973 \begin_layout Description
2974 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2978 \begin_layout Description
2979 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2983 \begin_layout Description
2984 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2985 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2986 There are three article layouts available.
2987 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2988 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2989 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2990 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2992 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2995 sequential numbering
2996 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2999 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
3000 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
3001 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
3002 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
3005 \begin_layout Description
3006 Beamer Layout for presentations
3009 \begin_layout Description
3010 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
3011 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3012 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3013 with \SpecialChar LyX
3017 \begin_layout Description
3018 Chess Layout to write about chess games
3021 \begin_layout Description
3023 \begin_inset space ~
3026 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3029 \begin_layout Description
3030 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3033 \begin_layout Description
3034 Foils Used to make transparencies
3037 \begin_layout Description
3038 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3039 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3040 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3041 with \SpecialChar LyX
3045 \begin_layout Description
3046 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
3047 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3050 \begin_layout Description
3051 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3054 \begin_layout Description
3055 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3058 \begin_layout Description
3059 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
3060 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
3061 (Is used by this document.)
3064 \begin_layout Description
3065 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3068 \begin_layout Description
3069 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3072 \begin_layout Description
3077 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
3078 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
3080 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3084 \begin_layout Description
3085 Slides Used to make transparencies
3088 \begin_layout Description
3090 \begin_inset space ~
3093 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
3094 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3097 \begin_layout Description
3098 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3101 \begin_layout Standard
3102 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
3104 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3106 Special Document Classes
3113 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
3114 of the document classes.
3117 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3121 \begin_layout Standard
3122 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3124 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3125 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3127 \begin_inset Index idx
3130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3139 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3143 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3147 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
3148 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
3150 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3153 \begin_layout Standard
3156 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3161 , are highly specialized.
3163 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3164 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3165 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3166 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3167 by some document class.
3168 There are just too many of them.
3169 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3172 \begin_layout Standard
3173 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3174 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3178 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3181 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3182 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3183 document class for a new file.
3185 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3188 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3195 manual for information on how to install them.
3196 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3202 \begin_layout Standard
3203 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3204 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3205 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3206 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3207 class files to be used for dissertation
3208 s submitted to those universities.
3209 The \SpecialChar LyX
3210 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3212 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3216 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3222 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3225 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3227 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3229 name "subsec:Modules"
3234 \begin_inset Index idx
3237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3246 \begin_layout Standard
3247 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3248 chosen document class.
3249 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3250 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3257 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3261 \begin_inset Index idx
3264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3271 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3275 \begin_layout Standard
3276 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3277 packages or file format converters that are not always
3278 installed by default.
3280 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3281 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3282 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3283 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3285 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3286 file without the missing prerequisites.
3287 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3288 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3291 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3295 \begin_inset Index idx
3298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3299 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3305 See section Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3310 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3313 \begin_layout Standard
3314 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3322 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3324 will advise you about these things.
3332 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3334 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3336 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3341 \begin_inset Index idx
3344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3345 Document ! Local Layout
3353 \begin_layout Standard
3354 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3355 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3356 : They are intended to be used in
3357 a variety of different documents.
3358 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3359 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3360 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3361 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
3362 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3364 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3366 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3370 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3382 manual for information on how to use it.
3385 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3389 \begin_layout Standard
3390 Each class has a default set of options.
3391 Here's a quick table describing them:
3394 \begin_layout Standard
3395 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3401 \begin_layout Standard
3403 \begin_inset Tabular
3404 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3405 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3406 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3407 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3408 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3409 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3410 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3412 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3421 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3439 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3457 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3475 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3495 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3512 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3530 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3548 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3566 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3586 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3603 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3621 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3639 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3657 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3677 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3694 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3712 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3730 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3748 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3768 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3785 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3803 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3821 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3839 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3864 \begin_layout Standard
3865 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3871 \begin_layout Standard
3872 You're probably also wondering what
3873 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3877 \begin_inset space ~
3881 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3885 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3886 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3891 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3896 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3906 headings, there are also
3914 headings, and so on.
3915 We will describe these headings fully in section
3916 \begin_inset space ~
3920 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3922 reference "subsec:Headings"
3929 \begin_layout Subsection
3931 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3933 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
3938 \begin_inset Index idx
3941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3948 \begin_inset Index idx
3951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3960 \begin_layout Standard
3961 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3963 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3970 \begin_inset space ~
3978 \begin_inset space ~
3983 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3985 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
3986 doesn't support special options you want to
3987 use for your document.
3988 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
3989 -class and its options, you have to read
3993 \begin_layout Standard
3997 \begin_inset space ~
4004 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4010 \begin_inset space ~
4015 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
4016 You can choose between the following five options:
4019 \begin_layout Labeling
4020 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4025 Use default page style of current class.
4028 \begin_layout Labeling
4029 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4034 No page numbers or headings.
4037 \begin_layout Labeling
4038 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4046 \begin_layout Labeling
4047 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4052 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4053 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4054 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
4055 maximum sectioning level of the class.
4058 \begin_layout Labeling
4059 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4064 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
4065 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4071 \begin_inset Index idx
4074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4082 How they are defined is explained in section
4083 \begin_inset space ~
4087 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4089 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4096 \begin_layout Standard
4097 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4098 \begin_inset space ~
4102 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4104 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4111 \begin_layout Subsection
4112 Paper Size and Orientation
4113 \begin_inset Index idx
4116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4117 Document ! Paper size
4123 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4125 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4132 \begin_layout Standard
4133 You can find the following options in the menu
4136 \begin_inset space ~
4143 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4147 \begin_inset Index idx
4150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4159 \begin_layout Labeling
4160 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4164 \begin_inset space ~
4169 What size paper to print on.
4174 \begin_layout Itemize
4180 \begin_layout Itemize
4186 \begin_layout Itemize
4192 \begin_layout Itemize
4198 \begin_layout Itemize
4201 US letter, US legal, US executive
4204 \begin_layout Itemize
4210 \begin_layout Itemize
4217 \begin_layout Labeling
4218 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4223 To choose whether to output as
4234 \begin_layout Labeling
4235 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4239 \begin_inset space ~
4244 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4245 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4248 \begin_layout Subsection
4250 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4252 name "subsec:Margins"
4257 \begin_inset Index idx
4260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4267 \begin_inset Index idx
4270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4279 \begin_layout Standard
4280 Paper margins are set in the menu
4282 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4286 \begin_inset Index idx
4289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4298 \begin_layout Standard
4299 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4300 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4301 the paper format and the font size into account.
4304 \begin_layout Subsection
4308 \begin_layout Standard
4309 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4315 That includes the paragraph environments.
4316 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4317 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4318 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4320 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4321 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4325 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4329 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4331 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4332 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4333 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4336 \begin_layout Section
4337 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4338 \begin_inset Index idx
4341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4342 Paragraph ! Indentation
4350 \begin_layout Subsection
4352 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4354 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4361 \begin_layout Standard
4362 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4363 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4366 \begin_layout Standard
4367 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4368 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4369 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4370 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4374 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4380 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4381 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4382 language than English.
4384 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4387 \begin_layout Standard
4388 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4389 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4390 into \SpecialChar LyX
4392 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4395 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4397 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4398 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4399 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4406 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4407 goes to produce a printable file.
4412 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4414 gives you the ability globally to change
4418 these pre-coded spacings.
4419 We will explain more later.
4422 \begin_layout Subsection
4423 Paragraph Separation
4424 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4426 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4431 \begin_inset Index idx
4434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4435 Paragraph ! Separation
4443 \begin_layout Standard
4451 \begin_inset space ~
4459 \begin_inset space ~
4466 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4470 \begin_inset Index idx
4473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4479 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4482 \begin_layout Subsection
4486 \begin_layout Standard
4487 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4490 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4492 \begin_inset space ~
4497 dialog and toggle the
4500 \begin_inset space ~
4505 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4508 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4512 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4513 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4517 \begin_layout Standard
4518 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4519 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4522 \begin_layout Subsection
4524 \begin_inset Index idx
4527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4528 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4536 \begin_layout Standard
4539 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4543 \begin_inset Index idx
4546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4555 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4559 \begin_inset space ~
4568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4569 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4575 \begin_inset Index idx
4578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4585 installed to use this feature.
4590 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4592 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4594 \begin_inset space ~
4599 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4600 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4603 \begin_layout Section
4604 Paragraph Environments
4605 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4607 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4612 \begin_inset Index idx
4615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4616 Paragraph ! Environments
4622 \begin_inset Index idx
4625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4626 Paragraph environments|(
4634 \begin_layout Subsection
4638 \begin_layout Standard
4639 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4642 \begin_layout Standard
4651 } \SpecialChar ldots
4661 \begin_inset Newline newline
4664 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4666 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4667 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4668 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4677 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4680 \begin_layout Standard
4681 A paragraph environment is simply a
4682 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4686 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4689 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4690 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4691 scheme, labels, and so on.
4692 Additionally, you can
4693 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4697 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4700 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4701 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4702 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4703 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4705 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4707 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4710 \begin_layout Standard
4711 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4712 \begin_inset Graphics
4713 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4719 at the left end of the toolbar.
4721 will change the environment of the
4725 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4726 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4727 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4731 \begin_layout Standard
4740 create a new paragraph using the
4744 paragraph environment.
4746 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4750 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4753 because if you are in one of these environments:
4756 \begin_layout Itemize
4762 \begin_layout Itemize
4768 \begin_layout Itemize
4774 \begin_layout Itemize
4780 \begin_layout Itemize
4786 \begin_layout Itemize
4792 \begin_layout Itemize
4798 \begin_layout Standard
4800 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4804 , rather than resetting it to
4809 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4810 \begin_inset space ~
4814 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4816 reference "sec:Nesting"
4823 \begin_layout Subsection
4827 \begin_layout Standard
4828 The default paragraph environment is
4833 It creates a plain paragraph.
4835 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4836 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4837 this manual) are in the
4844 \begin_layout Standard
4845 You can nest a paragraph using the
4849 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4857 \begin_layout Subsection
4859 \begin_inset Index idx
4862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4871 \begin_layout Standard
4872 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
4873 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
4875 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4879 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4882 for thanks or contact information.
4883 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4884 places all of this on a separate page
4885 along with today's date.
4886 For other types of documents, the title
4887 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4891 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4894 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4898 \begin_layout Standard
4900 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4914 Here's how you use them:
4917 \begin_layout Itemize
4918 Put the title of your document in the
4925 \begin_layout Itemize
4926 Put the author name in the
4933 \begin_layout Itemize
4934 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4935 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4941 Note that using this environment is optional.
4942 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4943 will automatically insert today's date.
4944 If you don't want a date, use the option
4946 Suppress default date on front page
4950 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4951 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
4953 \begin_inset space ~
4961 \begin_layout Standard
4962 You can use footnotes to insert
4963 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4967 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4970 or contact information.
4973 \begin_layout Subsection
4975 \begin_inset Index idx
4978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4985 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4987 name "subsec:Headings"
4994 \begin_layout Standard
4995 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
4997 takes care of the numbering for you.
5000 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5002 \begin_inset Index idx
5005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5006 Section headings ! Numbered
5014 \begin_layout Standard
5015 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
5019 \begin_layout Enumerate
5025 \begin_layout Enumerate
5031 \begin_layout Enumerate
5037 \begin_layout Enumerate
5043 \begin_layout Enumerate
5049 \begin_layout Enumerate
5055 \begin_layout Enumerate
5061 \begin_layout Standard
5063 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
5064 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
5065 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
5068 \begin_layout Standard
5069 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
5070 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
5071 You group the book into chapters.
5073 does a similar grouping:
5076 \begin_layout Itemize
5081 is divided into either
5092 \begin_layout Itemize
5104 \begin_layout Itemize
5116 \begin_layout Itemize
5128 \begin_layout Itemize
5140 \begin_layout Itemize
5152 \begin_layout Standard
5153 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5161 Not all document types use the
5165 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5170 is the top-level heading.
5178 \begin_layout Standard
5183 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5184 labels it with its number,
5185 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5187 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5189 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5193 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5199 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5201 \begin_inset Index idx
5204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5205 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5213 \begin_layout Standard
5214 The unnumbered section headings have a
5215 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5219 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5222 at the end of their name.
5223 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5224 the table of contents, see section
5225 \begin_inset space ~
5229 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5238 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5239 Changing the Numbering
5240 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5242 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5249 \begin_layout Standard
5250 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5251 in the Table of Contents.
5252 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5254 Just as certain classes start with
5268 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5278 This is something you can change.
5281 \begin_layout Standard
5284 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5288 \begin_inset Index idx
5291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5300 \begin_inset space ~
5304 \begin_inset space ~
5309 you will see two counters.
5314 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5315 numbers a section heading.
5316 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5320 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5321 Short Titles of Headings
5322 \begin_inset Index idx
5325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5326 Section headings ! Short titles
5332 \begin_inset Argument 1
5335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5342 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5344 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5351 \begin_layout Standard
5352 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5353 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5354 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5355 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5358 \begin_layout Standard
5360 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5361 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5362 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5363 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5366 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5368 \begin_inset space ~
5374 This will insert a box labeled
5375 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5379 \begin_inset space ~
5383 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5386 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5387 This also works for captions inside floats.
5388 There can only be one short title per title.
5391 \begin_layout Standard
5392 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5395 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5399 \begin_layout Standard
5400 The following information applies to all section headings:
5403 \begin_layout Itemize
5404 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5407 \begin_layout Itemize
5408 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5411 \begin_layout Itemize
5412 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5415 \begin_layout Itemize
5416 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5419 \begin_layout Subsection
5423 \begin_layout Standard
5425 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5439 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5440 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5441 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5442 the text they contain.
5443 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5451 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5454 \begin_layout Standard
5455 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5464 when you start a new paragraph.
5465 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5469 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5470 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5471 have to change back to the
5475 environment yourself.
5478 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5480 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5487 \begin_inset Index idx
5490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5499 \begin_layout Standard
5500 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5501 time for the differences.
5510 are identical except for one difference:
5514 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5523 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5526 \begin_layout Standard
5527 Here's an example of the
5540 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5542 See – no indentation!
5546 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5547 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5548 the other paragraph.
5551 \begin_layout Standard
5552 Here's another example, this time in the
5559 \begin_layout Quotation
5565 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5566 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5567 the first line, then
5571 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5575 you were quoting other text.
5578 \begin_layout Quotation
5579 Here's a new paragraph.
5580 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5581 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5584 \begin_layout Standard
5585 As the examples show,
5589 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5590 They should put quotes in the
5595 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5599 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5602 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5604 \begin_inset Index idx
5607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5614 \begin_inset Index idx
5617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5624 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5633 \begin_layout Standard
5638 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5644 \begin_inset Newline newline
5647 Which I did not rehearse!
5651 It could be much worse.
5652 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5654 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5655 indented a bit more than the first.
5656 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5662 \begin_inset Newline newline
5665 And make things look fine
5666 \begin_inset Newline newline
5672 arg "newline-insert newline"
5678 \begin_layout Standard
5683 does not indent both margins.
5684 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5685 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5688 arg "newline-insert newline"
5694 \begin_layout Subsection
5696 \begin_inset Index idx
5699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5706 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5715 \begin_layout Standard
5717 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5727 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5728 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5737 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5738 lets you provide your own label.
5739 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5740 describing some general features of all four of them.
5743 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5747 \begin_layout Standard
5748 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5750 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5751 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5760 reset the environment to
5764 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5765 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5766 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5770 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5774 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5781 \begin_layout Standard
5782 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5783 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
5784 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
5786 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5787 you read all of section
5788 \begin_inset space ~
5792 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5794 reference "sec:Nesting"
5801 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5803 \begin_inset Index idx
5806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5813 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5822 \begin_layout Standard
5823 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5827 paragraph environment.
5828 It has the following properties:
5831 \begin_layout Itemize
5832 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5836 \begin_layout Itemize
5838 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5841 \begin_layout Itemize
5842 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5846 \begin_layout Itemize
5847 The items can have any length.
5849 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5850 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5857 \begin_layout Itemize
5862 environment inside another
5866 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5870 \begin_layout Itemize
5871 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5874 \begin_layout Itemize
5876 always shows the same symbol on screen.
5879 \begin_layout Itemize
5881 \begin_inset space ~
5885 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5887 reference "sec:Nesting"
5891 for a full explanation of nesting.
5895 \begin_layout Standard
5896 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5905 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5908 \begin_layout Standard
5909 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5910 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5913 \begin_layout Itemize
5914 The label for the first level
5918 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5922 \begin_layout Itemize
5923 The label for the second level is a dash.
5927 \begin_layout Itemize
5928 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5932 \begin_layout Itemize
5933 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5937 \begin_layout Itemize
5938 Back out to the third level.
5942 \begin_layout Itemize
5943 Back to the second level.
5947 \begin_layout Itemize
5948 Back to the outermost level.
5951 \begin_layout Standard
5952 These are the default labels for an
5957 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5959 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5962 dialog in the submenu
5967 \begin_inset Index idx
5970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5976 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
5980 \begin_layout Standard
5981 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5982 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5984 \begin_inset space ~
5988 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5990 reference "sec:Nesting"
5997 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5999 \begin_inset Index idx
6002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6009 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6011 name "sec:Enumerate"
6018 \begin_layout Standard
6023 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
6024 It has these properties:
6027 \begin_layout Enumerate
6028 Each item has a numeral as its label.
6032 \begin_layout Enumerate
6033 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
6037 \begin_layout Enumerate
6039 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
6042 \begin_layout Enumerate
6047 environment resets the counter to one.
6050 \begin_layout Enumerate
6063 \begin_layout Enumerate
6064 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
6065 Items can have any length.
6068 \begin_layout Enumerate
6069 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
6072 \begin_layout Enumerate
6073 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
6076 \begin_layout Enumerate
6077 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
6081 \begin_layout Standard
6090 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
6092 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
6093 labels the four different levels in an
6100 \begin_layout Enumerate
6101 The first level of an
6105 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
6109 \begin_layout Enumerate
6110 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
6114 \begin_layout Enumerate
6115 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
6119 \begin_layout Enumerate
6120 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6123 \begin_layout Enumerate
6124 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6129 \begin_layout Enumerate
6130 Back to the third level
6134 \begin_layout Enumerate
6135 Back to the second level.
6139 \begin_layout Enumerate
6140 Back to the outermost level.
6143 \begin_layout Standard
6144 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6148 environment, see section
6149 \begin_inset space ~
6153 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6155 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6160 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6164 \begin_layout Standard
6165 There is more to nesting
6169 environments than we've stated here.
6170 You should read section
6171 \begin_inset space ~
6175 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6177 reference "sec:Nesting"
6181 to learn more about nesting.
6184 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6186 \begin_inset Index idx
6189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6198 \begin_layout Standard
6199 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6203 list has no fixed label.
6204 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6206 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6210 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6213 of the first line as the label.
6217 \begin_layout Description
6218 Example: This is an example of the
6225 \begin_layout Standard
6227 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6231 \begin_layout Standard
6233 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6237 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6240 it is meant that the first usage of the
6244 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6246 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6254 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6259 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6260 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6262 \begin_inset space ~
6268 \begin_inset space ~
6272 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6274 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6278 for more information.) Here is an example:
6281 \begin_layout Description
6283 \begin_inset space ~
6286 Example: This one shows how to use a
6289 \begin_inset space ~
6301 \begin_layout Description
6302 Usage: You should use the
6306 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6307 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6309 It's not a good idea to use a
6313 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6314 You're better off using
6326 paragraphs into them.
6329 \begin_layout Description
6330 Nesting: You can nest
6334 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6338 \begin_layout Standard
6339 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6340 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6341 them from the first line.
6344 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6346 \begin_inset Index idx
6349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6358 \begin_layout Standard
6363 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6364 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6368 \begin_layout Standard
6377 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6379 Here are its properties:
6382 \begin_layout Labeling
6383 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6385 \begin_inset space ~
6388 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6390 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6394 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6397 of each line as the item label.
6402 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6403 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6404 space as described above.
6407 \begin_layout Labeling
6408 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6409 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6410 uses different margins for the item label and the
6411 body of the item text.
6412 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6413 label width plus a little extra space.
6417 \begin_layout Labeling
6418 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6420 \begin_inset space ~
6423 width \SpecialChar LyX
6424 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6425 If the label width is larger, the label
6426 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6430 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6433 into the first line.
6434 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6435 margin of the rest of the item text.
6438 \begin_layout Labeling
6439 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6441 \begin_inset space ~
6444 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6449 environment has the same left margin.
6450 \begin_inset Newline newline
6453 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6456 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6458 \begin_inset space ~
6463 dialog (toolbar button
6466 arg "layout-paragraph"
6473 \begin_inset space ~
6478 determines the default label width.
6479 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6481 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6485 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6488 multiple times instead.
6489 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6492 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6496 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6499 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6502 \begin_inset space ~
6507 every time you alter a label in a
6512 \begin_inset Newline newline
6515 The predefined default width is the length of
6516 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6520 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6524 \begin_inset space ~
6530 \begin_layout Standard
6535 list the same way as the
6539 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6545 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6549 \begin_layout Standard
6554 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6555 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6557 \begin_inset space ~
6561 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6563 reference "sec:Nesting"
6567 to learn about nesting.
6570 \begin_layout Standard
6571 There is yet another feature of the
6575 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6576 left-justifies the item labels by
6578 You can use additional
6582 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6583 justifies the item label.
6588 are documented in section
6589 \begin_inset space ~
6593 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6595 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6600 Here are some examples:
6603 \begin_layout Labeling
6604 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6605 Left The default for
6612 \begin_layout Labeling
6613 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6614 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6621 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6624 \begin_layout Labeling
6625 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6626 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6630 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6637 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6640 \begin_layout Subsection
6642 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6644 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6649 \begin_inset Index idx
6652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6661 \begin_layout Standard
6662 The features described in this section require that the module
6664 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6666 is loaded in the document settings.
6667 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6673 \begin_inset Index idx
6676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6686 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6687 Custom Enumerate Lists
6688 \begin_inset Index idx
6691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6692 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6700 \begin_layout Standard
6702 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6705 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6708 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6709 There you add the command
6712 \begin_layout Standard
6720 \begin_layout Standard
6732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6733 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6734 Code, look at section
6735 \begin_inset space ~
6739 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6741 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6754 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6761 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6762 For capital Roman numerals replace
6774 in the command above.
6775 For Arabic numerals use
6783 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6787 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6790 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6805 \begin_layout Standard
6807 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6815 You can only number 26
6816 \begin_inset space ~
6819 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6827 \begin_layout Standard
6828 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6829 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6832 \begin_layout Standard
6833 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6836 \begin_layout Enumerate
6837 \begin_inset Argument 1
6840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6866 \begin_layout Enumerate
6867 \begin_inset Argument 1
6870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6893 \begin_layout Enumerate
6898 \begin_layout Enumerate
6899 \begin_inset Argument 1
6902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6926 \begin_layout Enumerate
6927 \begin_inset Argument 1
6930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6956 \begin_layout Standard
6957 For this list these commands were used:
6960 \begin_layout Standard
6971 \begin_inset Newline newline
6979 \begin_inset Newline newline
6987 \begin_inset Newline newline
6997 \begin_layout Standard
7004 makes the label emphasized and
7013 \begin_layout Standard
7014 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7022 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
7023 lists until you change the definition.
7031 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7033 \begin_inset Index idx
7036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7037 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
7045 \begin_layout Standard
7046 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
7049 \begin_layout Enumerate
7050 \begin_inset Argument 1
7053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7072 \begin_inset Note Note
7075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7076 goes back to default numbering
7084 \begin_layout Enumerate
7088 \begin_layout Standard
7092 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7096 \begin_layout Standard
7097 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7102 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7103 to indicate that it is a resumed
7104 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7105 , but in the output.
7108 \begin_layout Standard
7109 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7117 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7126 \begin_layout Standard
7127 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
7129 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7130 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7131 of a normal enumeration.
7132 There, insert the command
7135 \begin_layout Standard
7141 \begin_layout Standard
7146 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7150 \begin_layout Enumerate
7154 \begin_layout Enumerate
7158 \begin_layout Standard
7159 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7162 \begin_layout Enumerate
7163 \begin_inset Argument 1
7166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7182 This enumeration starts at 4
7185 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7187 \begin_inset Index idx
7190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7199 \begin_layout Standard
7200 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7202 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7205 \begin_layout Itemize
7209 \begin_layout Itemize
7210 with standard spacing
7213 \begin_layout Standard
7214 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7216 Add there the command
7220 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7223 \begin_layout Itemize
7224 \begin_inset Argument 1
7227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7246 \begin_layout Itemize
7250 \begin_layout Itemize
7254 \begin_layout Standard
7255 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7262 \begin_inset Index idx
7265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7273 For more information see its documentation,
7274 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7284 \begin_layout Standard
7285 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7287 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7288 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7289 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7292 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7295 \begin_layout Enumerate
7296 \begin_inset Argument 1
7299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7307 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7320 \begin_layout Enumerate
7321 with negative indentation
7324 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7325 Further Customization
7326 \begin_inset Index idx
7329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7330 Lists ! Customization
7338 \begin_layout Standard
7339 You can also change the style of description lists.
7343 \begin_layout Standard
7349 \begin_layout Standard
7350 changes the description label font, the command
7353 \begin_layout Standard
7359 \begin_layout Standard
7360 sets the list style.
7363 \begin_layout Standard
7364 An example where the command
7367 \begin_layout Standard
7372 itshape, style=nextline
7375 \begin_layout Standard
7379 \begin_layout Description
7381 \begin_inset space ~
7385 \begin_inset Argument 1
7388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7394 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7396 itshape, style=nextline
7406 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7407 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7411 \begin_layout Description
7413 \begin_inset space ~
7416 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7417 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7418 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7421 \begin_layout Standard
7422 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7428 \begin_inset Index idx
7431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7439 For more information see its documentation
7440 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7450 \begin_layout Subsection
7452 \begin_inset Index idx
7455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7464 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7466 \begin_inset space ~
7469 Address: An Overview
7472 \begin_layout Standard
7473 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7474 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7482 \begin_inset space ~
7488 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7489 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7490 gags on the document.
7491 In contrast, you can use the
7498 \begin_inset space ~
7503 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7504 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7508 \begin_layout Standard
7509 Of course, you're not limited to using
7516 \begin_inset space ~
7525 \begin_inset space ~
7530 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7531 some European academic papers.
7534 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7536 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7538 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7545 \begin_layout Standard
7550 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7551 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7555 \begin_inset space ~
7560 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7561 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7562 Here's an example of each:
7565 \begin_layout Right Address
7567 \begin_inset Newline newline
7571 \begin_inset Newline newline
7575 \begin_inset Newline newline
7578 When is it? What is today?
7581 \begin_layout Standard
7585 \begin_inset space ~
7591 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
7593 the largest block of text on a single line.
7594 Here's an example of the
7601 \begin_layout Address
7603 \begin_inset Newline newline
7606 Where do I send this
7607 \begin_inset Newline newline
7610 Your post office and country
7613 \begin_layout Standard
7614 As you can see, both
7621 \begin_inset space ~
7626 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7631 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
7632 resets the nesting depth and sets the
7638 This makes sense, since
7646 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7647 Thus, you have to use
7654 arg "newline-insert newline"
7659 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7660 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7662 \begin_inset space ~
7666 \begin_inset space ~
7671 ) to start a new line in an
7678 \begin_inset space ~
7686 \begin_layout Subsection
7690 \begin_layout Standard
7691 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7692 or list of references.
7694 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7697 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7699 \begin_inset Index idx
7702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7711 \begin_layout Standard
7716 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7717 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7718 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7719 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7733 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7734 The book document classes ignores the
7738 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7742 in a letter document class.
7745 \begin_layout Standard
7750 environment does several things for you.
7751 First, it puts the centered label
7752 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7756 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7760 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7762 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7763 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7764 the subsequent text.
7765 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
7767 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7771 \begin_layout Standard
7772 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7776 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7777 The new paragraph will still be in the
7782 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7783 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7786 \begin_layout Standard
7787 \begin_inset Float figure
7792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7794 \begin_inset Graphics
7795 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7803 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7806 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7808 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7829 \begin_layout Standard
7830 We would love to demonstrate the
7834 environment, but since this document is in the
7835 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7839 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7842 class, we can't do this.
7843 We inserted it therefore as figure
7844 \begin_inset space ~
7848 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7850 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7855 If you have never heard of an
7856 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7860 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7863 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7866 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7868 \begin_inset Index idx
7871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7878 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7880 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
7887 \begin_layout Standard
7892 environment is used to list references.
7893 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7894 only use it at the end of the document.
7906 \begin_layout Standard
7907 When you first open a
7911 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
7912 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7913 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7917 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7921 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7925 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7928 depending on the document class.
7929 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7930 Each paragraph of the
7934 environment is a bibliography entry.
7939 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7940 Each new paragraph is still in the
7947 \begin_layout Standard
7948 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7949 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
7951 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
7953 handling, have a look at section
7954 \begin_inset space ~
7958 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7960 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7967 \begin_layout Subsection
7968 Special Environments
7971 \begin_layout Standard
7973 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
7974 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
7977 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7982 \begin_inset Index idx
7985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7993 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7995 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
8002 \begin_layout Standard
8008 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
8010 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
8015 key as a fixed whitespace.
8019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8032 \begin_inset space ~
8037 instead of an end-of-word marker.
8055 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
8058 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
8061 arg "newline-insert newline"
8078 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8079 So, when you finish using the
8084 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8085 Also, you can nest the
8090 environment inside of others.
8093 \begin_layout Standard
8094 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8097 \begin_layout Itemize
8101 arg "newline-insert newline"
8104 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8105 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8109 \begin_inset space \space{}
8119 arg "newline-insert newline"
8125 \begin_layout Itemize
8129 arg "newline-insert newline"
8139 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8145 \begin_layout Itemize
8146 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8147 You must put at least one
8151 in any line you want blank.
8152 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8156 \begin_layout Itemize
8157 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8161 since that will insert
8166 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8169 arg "self-insert \""
8175 \begin_layout Standard
8179 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8183 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8187 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8191 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8195 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8196 printf("Hello World!
8201 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8205 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8209 \begin_layout Standard
8210 This is just the standard
8211 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8215 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8222 \begin_layout Standard
8228 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8230 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8231 as if you used a typewriter.
8232 \begin_inset Index idx
8235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8236 Paragraph environments|)
8241 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8244 Program Code Listings
8249 \begin_inset space ~
8257 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8261 \begin_inset Index idx
8264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8273 \begin_layout Standard
8278 environment is similar to the
8283 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8284 computer console text.
8289 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8303 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8304 you can have empty lines.
8317 \begin_layout Itemize
8318 have a certain language and a text style
8321 \begin_layout Itemize
8322 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8323 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8324 and \SpecialChar TeX
8328 \begin_layout Standard
8329 Because of these properties
8333 works like a typewriter.
8337 \begin_layout Verbatim
8341 \begin_layout Verbatim
8344 The following 2 lines are empty:
8347 \begin_layout Verbatim
8351 \begin_layout Verbatim
8355 \begin_layout Verbatim
8356 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8361 \begin_layout Standard
8366 environment is identical to
8370 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8371 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
8378 \begin_layout Verbatim*
8382 \begin_layout Section
8383 Nesting Environments
8384 \begin_inset Index idx
8387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8388 Nesting ! Environments
8394 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8403 \begin_layout Subsection
8407 \begin_layout Standard
8409 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8411 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8413 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8415 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8417 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8421 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8427 \begin_layout Enumerate
8431 \begin_layout Enumerate
8436 \begin_layout Enumerate
8440 \begin_layout Enumerate
8445 \begin_layout Enumerate
8449 \begin_layout Standard
8450 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8451 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8453 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8455 \begin_inset space ~
8459 \begin_inset space ~
8467 \begin_inset space ~
8471 \begin_inset space ~
8476 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8478 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8481 arg "depth-increment"
8487 arg "depth-decrement"
8501 arg "depth-increment"
8507 arg "depth-decrement"
8511 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8512 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8516 \begin_layout Standard
8517 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8518 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8519 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8520 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8521 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8524 \begin_layout Standard
8525 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8527 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8529 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8532 \begin_layout Subsection
8533 What You Can and Can't Nest
8536 \begin_layout Standard
8537 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8538 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8541 \begin_layout Standard
8542 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8543 than a simple yes or no.
8544 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8547 \begin_layout Itemize
8548 Completely unnestable
8551 \begin_layout Itemize
8552 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8556 \begin_layout Itemize
8557 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8561 \begin_layout Standard
8562 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8563 environments have them:
8566 \begin_layout Description
8567 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8568 Can't nest into them.
8572 \begin_layout Itemize
8578 \begin_layout Itemize
8584 \begin_layout Itemize
8590 \begin_layout Itemize
8596 \begin_layout Itemize
8603 \begin_layout Description
8605 \begin_inset space ~
8608 Nestable You can nest them.
8609 You can nest other things into them.
8613 \begin_layout Itemize
8619 \begin_layout Itemize
8625 \begin_layout Itemize
8631 \begin_layout Itemize
8637 \begin_layout Itemize
8643 \begin_layout Itemize
8649 \begin_layout Itemize
8655 \begin_layout Itemize
8662 \begin_layout Itemize
8668 \begin_layout Itemize
8675 \begin_layout Description
8676 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8677 You can't nest anything into them.
8681 \begin_layout Itemize
8687 \begin_layout Itemize
8693 \begin_layout Itemize
8699 \begin_layout Itemize
8705 \begin_layout Itemize
8711 \begin_layout Itemize
8717 \begin_layout Itemize
8723 \begin_layout Itemize
8729 \begin_layout Itemize
8735 \begin_layout Itemize
8741 \begin_layout Itemize
8747 \begin_layout Itemize
8753 \begin_layout Itemize
8759 \begin_layout Itemize
8763 \begin_inset space ~
8769 \begin_layout Itemize
8776 \begin_layout Standard
8777 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8785 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8795 \begin_inset space ~
8798 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8799 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8800 nested section headings violate this.
8808 \begin_layout Subsection
8809 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8810 \begin_inset Index idx
8813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8814 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8822 \begin_layout Standard
8823 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8824 affected by nesting anyhow.
8828 \begin_layout Itemize
8832 \begin_layout Itemize
8836 \begin_layout Itemize
8840 \begin_layout Standard
8842 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8850 Figures and tables in
8854 are not affected by this.
8859 Have a look at section
8860 \begin_inset space ~
8864 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8866 reference "sec:Floats"
8870 for more information about
8877 \begin_layout Standard
8879 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8880 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8884 \begin_layout Standard
8885 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8886 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8890 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8893 of its own, it behaves just like a
8894 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8898 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8901 paragraph environment.
8902 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8906 \begin_layout Standard
8907 Here's an example with a table:
8910 \begin_layout Enumerate
8915 \begin_layout Enumerate
8916 This is (a) and it's nested.
8920 \begin_layout Standard
8921 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8927 \begin_layout Standard
8929 \begin_inset Tabular
8930 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8931 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8932 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8933 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8935 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8953 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8973 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8991 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9017 \begin_layout Standard
9018 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9025 \begin_layout Enumerate
9027 The table is actually nested inside (a).
9031 \begin_layout Enumerate
9035 \begin_layout Standard
9036 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
9039 \begin_layout Enumerate
9044 \begin_layout Enumerate
9045 This is (a) and it's nested.
9049 \begin_layout Standard
9050 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9056 \begin_layout Standard
9058 \begin_inset Tabular
9059 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9060 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9061 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9062 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9064 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9082 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9102 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9146 \begin_layout Standard
9147 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9153 \begin_layout Enumerate
9160 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9163 \begin_layout Enumerate
9167 \begin_layout Standard
9168 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9172 \begin_layout Standard
9173 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9176 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9179 \begin_layout Enumerate
9184 \begin_layout Enumerate
9185 This is (a) and it's nested.
9188 \begin_layout Standard
9189 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9195 \begin_layout Standard
9197 \begin_inset Tabular
9198 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9199 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9200 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9201 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9221 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9241 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9259 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9286 \begin_layout Standard
9287 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9293 \begin_layout Enumerate
9295 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9302 \begin_layout Enumerate
9306 \begin_layout Standard
9307 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9313 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9314 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9318 \begin_layout Subsection
9319 Usage and General Features
9322 \begin_layout Standard
9323 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9324 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9326 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9330 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9333 is the innermost possible depth.
9334 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9337 \begin_layout Enumerate
9338 level #1 – outermost
9342 \begin_layout Enumerate
9347 \begin_layout Enumerate
9352 \begin_layout Enumerate
9357 \begin_layout Itemize
9362 \begin_layout Itemize
9371 \begin_layout Standard
9372 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9373 both of them in the example.
9374 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9384 For example, if we tried to nest another
9389 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9393 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9396 , we would get errors.
9399 \begin_layout Subsection
9401 \begin_inset Index idx
9404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9413 \begin_layout Standard
9414 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9415 We have several examples of nested environments.
9416 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9420 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9421 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9424 \begin_layout Labeling
9425 \labelwidthstring MMM
9426 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9435 \begin_layout Labeling
9436 \labelwidthstring MMM
9437 #2-a This is level #2.
9438 We created it by using
9441 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9447 arg "depth-increment"
9454 \begin_layout Labeling
9455 \labelwidthstring MMM
9456 #3-a This is level #3.
9457 This time, we just enter
9464 arg "depth-increment"
9468 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9472 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9478 arg "depth-increment"
9485 \begin_layout Standard
9490 environment, nested inside of
9491 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9495 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9499 So, it's at level #4.
9500 We did this by entering
9503 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9509 arg "depth-increment"
9512 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9517 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9533 \begin_layout Standard
9538 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9541 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9547 \begin_layout Labeling
9548 \labelwidthstring MMM
9549 #4-a This is level #4.
9553 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9556 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9561 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9565 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9570 keep nesting things inside
9571 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9575 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9582 \begin_layout Labeling
9583 \labelwidthstring MMM
9584 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9589 \begin_layout Labeling
9590 \labelwidthstring MMM
9591 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9592 and this is level #6.
9593 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9597 \begin_layout Labeling
9598 \labelwidthstring MMM
9599 #5-b Back to level #5.
9603 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9609 arg "depth-decrement"
9616 \begin_layout Labeling
9617 \labelwidthstring MMM
9621 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9627 arg "depth-decrement"
9630 , we're back at level #4.
9634 \begin_layout Labeling
9635 \labelwidthstring MMM
9636 #3-b Back to level #3.
9637 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9641 \begin_layout Labeling
9642 \labelwidthstring MMM
9643 #2-b Back to level #2.
9648 \begin_layout Labeling
9649 \labelwidthstring MMM
9650 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9651 After this sentence, we will enter
9655 and change the paragraph environment back to
9662 \begin_layout Standard
9663 We could have also used the
9679 environment in place of the
9684 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9687 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9688 Example 2: Inheritance
9691 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9692 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9695 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9704 arg "depth-increment"
9708 \begin_inset Newline newline
9711 which, we will change to the
9719 \begin_layout Enumerate
9724 environment, at level #2.
9727 \begin_layout Enumerate
9728 Notice how the nested
9732 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9736 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9740 \begin_layout Standard
9741 We ended this example by entering
9746 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9750 and reset the nesting depth by using
9753 arg "depth-decrement"
9759 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9760 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9769 \begin_inset Argument 1
9772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9773 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9781 \begin_layout Enumerate
9782 This is level #1, in an
9786 paragraph environment.
9787 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9791 \begin_layout Enumerate
9796 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9802 arg "depth-increment"
9806 Now, what happens if we nest an
9810 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9811 label be? An asterisk?
9815 \begin_layout Itemize
9825 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9826 So, its label is a bullet.
9827 (We got here by using
9830 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9836 arg "depth-increment"
9839 , then changing the environment to
9847 \begin_layout Itemize
9848 Here's level #4, produced using
9851 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9857 arg "depth-increment"
9861 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
9866 \begin_layout Enumerate
9869 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9874 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9878 , because we are in the
9886 environment (that is, it is an
9901 \begin_layout Enumerate
9906 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9907 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
9911 \begin_layout Enumerate
9912 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9915 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9918 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9921 \begin_layout Enumerate
9925 arg "depth-decrement"
9928 to decrease the depth after the next
9931 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9938 \begin_layout Enumerate
9940 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
9945 \begin_layout Enumerate
9947 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9948 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
9952 \begin_layout Enumerate
9953 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9962 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
9967 reset the counter for the label.
9971 \begin_layout Enumerate
9975 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9981 arg "depth-decrement"
9984 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9985 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9986 into the twofold-nested
9994 \begin_layout Enumerate
9995 The same thing happens if we do another
9998 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10004 arg "depth-decrement"
10007 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
10010 \begin_layout Standard
10011 Lastly, we reset the environment to
10016 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
10027 The number of other
10031 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10038 The same rule applies for the
10042 environment, as well.
10045 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10046 Example 4: Going Bonkers
10049 \begin_layout Enumerate
10050 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10051 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
10052 the same detail with how we did it.
10061 \begin_layout Standard
10069 arg "depth-increment"
10076 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
10077 the example in parentheses someplace.
10078 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10079 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10080 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
10084 \begin_layout Enumerate
10089 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10093 \begin_layout Verse
10094 Now we will add verse.
10095 \begin_inset Newline newline
10098 It will get much worse.
10099 \begin_inset Newline newline
10109 arg "depth-increment"
10119 \begin_layout Verse
10120 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10121 \begin_inset Newline newline
10124 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10125 \begin_inset Newline newline
10131 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10139 \begin_layout Verse
10140 Here comes a table:
10144 \begin_layout Standard
10145 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10151 \begin_layout Standard
10153 \begin_inset Tabular
10154 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10155 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10156 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10157 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10159 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10177 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10197 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10242 \begin_layout Verse
10246 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10256 arg "depth-increment"
10262 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10268 \begin_inset Newline newline
10276 arg "depth-decrement"
10283 \begin_layout Enumerate
10288 : level #1) This is another item.
10289 Note that selecting a
10293 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10294 3 times to put the table inside the
10302 \begin_layout Quotation
10303 We're now ending the
10307 list and changing to
10312 We're still at level #1.
10313 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10314 The next set of paragraphs is a
10315 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10319 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10322 We will nest both the
10329 \begin_inset space ~
10334 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10338 for the letter body.
10342 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10345 to preserve the depth.
10346 Remember that you need to use
10349 arg "newline-insert newline"
10352 to create multiple lines inside the
10359 \begin_inset space ~
10369 \begin_layout Right Address
10371 \begin_inset Newline newline
10374 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10375 \begin_inset Newline newline
10381 \begin_layout Address
10383 \begin_inset space ~
10389 \begin_layout Quotation
10390 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10391 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10394 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10395 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10396 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10397 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10398 as soon as possible.
10399 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10402 \begin_layout Quotation
10403 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10404 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10405 with your order, along with payment.
10408 \begin_layout Quotation
10409 We thank you again for your patience.
10412 \begin_layout Address
10414 \begin_inset Newline newline
10421 \begin_layout Quotation
10422 That ends that example!
10425 \begin_layout Standard
10426 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10427 gives you a lot of power with just
10429 We could have easily nested an
10450 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10453 \begin_layout Subsection
10455 \begin_inset Index idx
10458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10459 Nesting ! Separation
10465 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10467 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10474 \begin_layout Standard
10475 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10477 For example you need two different enumerations:
10480 \begin_layout Enumerate
10485 \begin_layout Enumerate
10490 \begin_layout Enumerate
10494 \begin_layout Standard
10495 \begin_inset Separator plain
10501 \begin_layout Itemize
10507 \begin_layout Standard
10508 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10514 \begin_layout Enumerate
10518 \begin_layout Enumerate
10522 \begin_layout Enumerate
10526 \begin_layout Standard
10527 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10528 list item and use the menu
10530 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10531 Start New Environment
10534 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
10535 ) and behind it the new list.
10538 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10539 Start New Parent Environment
10541 only appears if the item is nested.
10542 It does not only separate the list but also creates a new one outside the
10546 \begin_layout Standard
10547 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator
10548 (red arrow in LyX).
10549 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10550 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10553 \begin_layout Standard
10554 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10557 arg "paragraph-break"
10564 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10567 \begin_layout Section
10568 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10569 \begin_inset Index idx
10572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10581 \begin_layout Standard
10582 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10583 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10585 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10586 be broken at the end of a line.
10587 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10591 \begin_layout Subsection
10593 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10595 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
10600 \begin_inset Index idx
10603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10612 \begin_layout Standard
10613 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
10614 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
10615 ) not to break the line at
10617 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10620 \begin_layout Quote
10621 Further documentation is given in section
10622 \begin_inset Newline newline
10626 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10628 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10636 \begin_layout Standard
10637 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10638 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10642 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10646 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10650 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10652 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10657 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10661 A protected space is set with
10663 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10664 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10666 \begin_inset space ~
10674 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10680 \begin_layout Subsection
10682 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10684 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
10689 \begin_inset Index idx
10692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10693 Spacing ! Horizontal
10701 \begin_layout Standard
10702 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10704 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10705 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10709 The length units are listed in Appendix
10710 \begin_inset space ~
10714 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10716 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10723 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10725 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10727 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
10732 \begin_inset Index idx
10735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10736 Spaces ! Inter-word
10744 \begin_layout Standard
10745 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10746 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10747 at the ends of sentences.
10748 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
10749 automatically takes care about this.
10750 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10751 followed by a period; see section
10752 \begin_inset space ~
10756 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10758 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
10763 To insert a normal space, select
10765 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10766 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10768 \begin_inset space ~
10776 arg "space-insert normal"
10782 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10784 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10786 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
10791 \begin_inset Index idx
10794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10803 \begin_layout Standard
10805 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10809 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10812 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10813 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10817 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10821 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10822 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10823 inside abbreviations:
10826 \begin_layout Quote
10828 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10832 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10835 \begin_layout Standard
10836 or between values and units.
10837 Compare for example this:
10838 \begin_inset Newline newline
10842 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10846 \begin_inset Newline newline
10849 10 kg (normal space
10852 \begin_layout Standard
10853 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10855 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10856 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10858 \begin_inset space ~
10866 arg "space-insert thin"
10872 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10876 \begin_layout Standard
10877 You can also insert the following space types:
10880 \begin_layout Description
10882 \begin_inset space ~
10886 \begin_inset space ~
10889 space A line with a
10890 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10894 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10898 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10901 negative thin space between the arrows.
10904 \begin_layout Description
10906 \begin_inset space ~
10910 \begin_inset space ~
10913 space A line with a
10914 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10918 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
10922 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10925 negative medium space between the arrows.
10928 \begin_layout Description
10930 \begin_inset space ~
10934 \begin_inset space ~
10937 space A line with a
10938 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10942 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
10946 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10949 negative thick space between the arrows.
10952 \begin_layout Description
10954 \begin_inset space ~
10958 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10962 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10966 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10970 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10974 \begin_inset space ~
10978 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10981 em) space between the arrows.
10984 \begin_layout Description
10986 \begin_inset space ~
10990 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10994 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10998 \begin_inset space \quad{}
11002 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11006 \begin_inset space ~
11010 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11013 em) space between the arrows.
11016 \begin_layout Description
11018 \begin_inset space ~
11022 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11026 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11030 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11034 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11038 \begin_inset space ~
11042 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11045 em) space between the arrows.
11048 \begin_layout Description
11050 \begin_inset space ~
11054 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11058 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11063 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11067 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11070 cm space between the arrows.
11073 \begin_layout Standard
11075 \begin_inset space ~
11079 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11081 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
11085 lists the different space sizes.
11088 \begin_layout Standard
11089 \begin_inset Float table
11094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11095 \begin_inset Caption Standard
11097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11098 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11100 name "tab:Width-of-the"
11104 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
11112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11114 \begin_inset Tabular
11115 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
11116 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11117 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11118 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11131 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11144 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11153 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11158 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11168 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11177 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11182 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11206 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11216 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11225 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11230 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11234 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11238 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11248 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11257 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11262 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11272 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11281 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11286 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11301 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11309 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11314 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11324 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11329 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11337 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11342 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11352 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11357 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11365 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11370 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11391 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11393 \begin_inset Index idx
11396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11405 \begin_layout Standard
11406 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11407 feature for adding extra space
11408 in a uniform fashion.
11409 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11410 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11411 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11412 equally between themselves.
11415 \begin_layout Standard
11416 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11419 \begin_layout Quote
11421 This is on the left side
11422 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11425 This is on the right
11428 \begin_layout Quote
11431 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11435 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11441 \begin_layout Quote
11444 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11448 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11452 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11458 \begin_layout Standard
11459 That was an example in the
11465 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11469 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11473 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11476 is one in a standard paragraph.
11477 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11481 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11484 \begin_layout Standard
11485 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11488 \begin_inset space ~
11493 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11496 \begin_layout Standard
11498 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11502 \begin_inset space ~
11508 \begin_layout Standard
11510 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11514 \begin_inset space ~
11520 \begin_layout Standard
11522 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11526 \begin_inset space ~
11532 \begin_layout Standard
11534 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11538 \begin_inset space ~
11544 \begin_layout Standard
11546 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11550 \begin_inset space ~
11556 \begin_layout Standard
11558 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11562 \begin_inset space ~
11568 \begin_layout Standard
11569 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11577 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11581 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
11583 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11584 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11588 option in the space dialog.
11596 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11598 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11600 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
11605 \begin_inset Index idx
11608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11617 \begin_layout Standard
11618 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11619 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11622 \begin_layout Standard
11623 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11626 What is correct English?:
11627 \begin_inset Newline newline
11631 \begin_inset Newline newline
11635 \begin_inset space ~
11638 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11639 \begin_inset Newline newline
11643 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11654 \begin_inset Newline newline
11658 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11669 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11675 \begin_layout Standard
11677 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11678 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11682 \begin_inset space ~
11686 \begin_inset space ~
11690 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11694 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11696 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11697 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11701 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11703 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11707 \begin_inset space ~
11711 \begin_inset space ~
11715 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11718 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11719 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11723 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11727 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11728 That is why it is named
11729 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11733 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11737 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11738 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11742 \begin_layout Subsection
11744 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11746 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
11751 \begin_inset Index idx
11754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11763 \begin_layout Standard
11764 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11766 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11767 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11769 \begin_inset space ~
11775 There you find the following sizes:
11778 \begin_layout Standard
11791 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
11792 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11797 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11799 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
11800 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
11802 \begin_inset space ~
11808 \begin_inset Index idx
11811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11812 Document ! Settings
11817 for the paragraph separation.
11818 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11829 \begin_layout Standard
11835 \begin_inset Index idx
11838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11844 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11845 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11850 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11851 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11860 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11869 s are described in section
11870 \begin_inset space ~
11874 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11876 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11885 If there are several
11889 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11890 You can therefore use
11894 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11897 \begin_layout Standard
11902 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11903 \begin_inset space ~
11907 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11909 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11916 \begin_layout Standard
11917 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11927 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11928 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11940 \begin_layout Subsection
11941 Paragraph Alignment
11942 \begin_inset Index idx
11945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11946 Paragraph ! Alignment
11954 \begin_layout Standard
11955 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11957 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
11960 dialog (toolbar button
11963 arg "layout-paragraph"
11967 There are five possibilities:
11970 \begin_layout Itemize
11978 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11984 \begin_layout Itemize
11992 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
11998 \begin_layout Itemize
12006 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
12012 \begin_layout Itemize
12020 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
12026 \begin_layout Itemize
12034 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
12040 \begin_layout Standard
12041 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
12042 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
12043 the left and right margins.
12044 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
12047 \begin_layout Standard
12049 This paragraph is right aligned,
12052 \begin_layout Standard
12054 this one is centered,
12057 \begin_layout Standard
12059 this one is left aligned.
12062 \begin_layout Subsection
12064 \begin_inset Index idx
12067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12068 Page breaks ! Forced
12074 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12076 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
12083 \begin_layout Standard
12084 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
12085 does the page breaks in your document, you can
12086 force a page break where you want one.
12087 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
12088 is good at page breaking.
12089 Only if you use a lot of
12093 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
12094 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
12097 \begin_layout Standard
12098 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
12099 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
12103 have to change the page breaking.
12106 \begin_layout Standard
12107 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
12109 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
12111 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12112 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12114 \begin_inset space ~
12120 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
12122 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12123 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12125 \begin_inset space ~
12130 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
12132 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
12133 on which only the last few lines are absent.
12136 \begin_layout Standard
12137 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
12138 at the top of a page.
12139 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
12141 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
12142 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
12143 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
12145 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12147 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
12151 to learn more about
12158 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12160 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12162 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
12167 \begin_inset Index idx
12170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12171 Page breaks ! Clear
12179 \begin_layout Standard
12180 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12181 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12182 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12183 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12184 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12187 \begin_layout Standard
12188 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12190 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12191 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12193 \begin_inset space ~
12199 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12201 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12202 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12204 \begin_inset space ~
12208 \begin_inset space ~
12213 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12214 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12217 \begin_layout Subsection
12219 \begin_inset Index idx
12222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12229 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12231 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12238 \begin_layout Standard
12239 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12241 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12243 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12244 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12246 \begin_inset space ~
12250 \begin_inset space ~
12258 arg "newline-insert newline"
12262 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12264 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12265 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12267 \begin_inset space ~
12271 \begin_inset space ~
12279 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12282 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12284 This is useful to avoid
12285 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12289 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12292 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12295 \begin_layout Standard
12296 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12297 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12299 very good at line breaking.
12300 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to set
12301 a line break actively, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12302 \begin_inset space ~
12306 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12308 reference "sec:Quote"
12313 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12315 reference "sec:Verse"
12320 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12322 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12329 \begin_layout Subsection
12331 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12333 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12338 \begin_inset Index idx
12341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12350 \begin_layout Standard
12352 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12363 \begin_layout Standard
12367 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12368 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12370 \begin_inset space ~
12375 you can insert horizontal lines.
12376 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12377 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12378 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12381 \begin_layout Standard
12383 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12394 \begin_layout Section
12395 Characters and Symbols
12398 \begin_layout Standard
12399 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12400 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12401 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12403 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12407 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12409 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12413 for information on how this is done.
12416 \begin_layout Standard
12417 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12422 dialog via the menu
12424 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12425 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12431 \begin_layout Standard
12432 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12440 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12441 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
12443 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12451 \begin_layout Section
12452 Fonts and Text Styles
12453 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12455 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12462 \begin_layout Subsection
12464 \begin_inset Index idx
12467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12476 \begin_layout Standard
12477 There are two types of fonts:
12480 \begin_layout Description
12482 \begin_inset space ~
12486 \begin_inset Index idx
12489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12495 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12496 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12500 characters) in the font.
12501 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12502 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12503 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12504 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12505 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12506 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12507 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12508 \begin_inset Newline newline
12511 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12512 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12513 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12514 sizes than at small ones.
12515 \begin_inset Newline newline
12529 \begin_inset space ~
12537 \begin_layout Description
12539 \begin_inset space ~
12543 \begin_inset Index idx
12546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12552 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12553 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12554 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12555 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12556 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12557 image manipulation program.
12558 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12559 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12560 \begin_inset space ~
12563 pixels high up to 34
12564 \begin_inset space ~
12567 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12568 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12569 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12571 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12572 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12573 \begin_inset Newline newline
12576 Bitmap fonts are named
12579 \begin_inset space ~
12584 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12587 \begin_layout Standard
12588 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12589 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12590 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12591 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12592 use scalable fonts.
12595 \begin_layout Standard
12596 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12599 \begin_layout Standard
12600 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12601 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12602 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12603 font to emphasize text, you use an
12604 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12608 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12612 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
12614 In \SpecialChar LyX
12615 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12619 \begin_layout Subsection
12622 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12624 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12631 \begin_layout Standard
12632 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
12633 used its own fonts.
12634 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12635 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12638 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12639 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
12640 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12641 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12642 to a word processor.
12643 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12644 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12645 files are very portable across
12646 different machines.
12647 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
12648 has increased a lot
12649 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12652 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12654 \begin_inset space ~
12658 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12660 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
12665 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
12666 code in the document
12667 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12670 \begin_layout Standard
12671 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
12672 engines that are also able directly
12673 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12675 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12677 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
12679 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12680 that is installed on your system.
12681 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12684 \begin_layout Standard
12685 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12693 In practice, some fonts might fail due to a legacy (non Unicode) font encoding,
12694 bad metrics, or other font deficiencies; so you might have to experiment.
12702 \begin_layout Subsection
12703 Document Font and Font size
12704 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12706 name "subsec:Document-Font"
12711 \begin_inset Index idx
12714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12721 \begin_inset Index idx
12724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12733 \begin_layout Standard
12734 You can set the document fonts in the
12736 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12740 \begin_inset Index idx
12743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12744 Document ! Settings
12754 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12755 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12758 \begin_inset space ~
12767 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12769 \begin_inset space ~
12772 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12775 \begin_layout Standard
12780 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12781 This requires that you use
12793 as the output format, i.
12794 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12798 \begin_inset space \space{}
12801 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12802 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12803 installed (see section
12804 \begin_inset space ~
12808 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12810 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12815 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
12817 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
12818 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
12820 \begin_inset space ~
12823 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
12824 cannot determine the family.
12825 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12826 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
12829 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12832 \begin_layout Standard
12833 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
12834 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
12839 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12845 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12846 With LyX's default font encoding, this is a look-alike of the standard
12849 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12855 \begin_inset space ~
12861 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12869 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12877 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12881 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12886 European Computer Modern
12889 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12897 However, some classes set different default fonts.
12900 \begin_layout Standard
12905 is a bitmap font, it looks pixelated in PDF output, especially when you
12906 read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12911 This problem is less severe if you read PDFs in
12914 \begin_inset space ~
12919 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12925 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12926 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
12929 \begin_layout Itemize
12933 \begin_inset space ~
12938 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
12951 \begin_inset space ~
12956 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
12957 community in order to replace
12961 as the default font.
12962 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
12963 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
12966 \begin_inset space ~
12979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12980 One difference is improved kerning.
12988 \begin_layout Itemize
12989 If you do not like the look of
12997 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
12998 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13002 \begin_inset space ~
13008 \begin_inset space ~
13018 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13019 \begin_inset space ~
13022 serif and typewriter fonts,
13026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13027 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13028 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13034 \begin_inset space ~
13043 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13044 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13048 \begin_inset space \space{}
13056 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13060 \begin_inset space \space{}
13066 \begin_inset space ~
13074 \begin_inset space ~
13084 but you can also select your own.
13085 \begin_inset Newline newline
13088 The differences between roman,
13091 \begin_inset space ~
13100 fonts are explained in section
13101 \begin_inset space ~
13105 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13107 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13112 \begin_inset Newline newline
13118 \begin_inset space ~
13123 was originally designed for newspapers.
13124 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13125 into the small newspaper columns.
13129 \begin_inset space ~
13134 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13137 \begin_layout Standard
13138 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13151 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13156 depends on the class you are using.
13157 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13160 \begin_layout Standard
13161 Note that the font size is the
13166 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13167 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13168 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13169 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13172 \begin_inset space ~
13178 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13179 \begin_inset space ~
13183 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13185 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13192 \begin_layout Standard
13196 \begin_inset space ~
13201 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13203 \begin_inset space ~
13206 serif or typewriter.
13211 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13221 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13224 \begin_layout Standard
13229 LaTeX font encoding
13231 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13232 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13238 \begin_inset Index idx
13241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13249 \begin_inset space ~
13253 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13255 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13260 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13261 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13268 \begin_layout Standard
13269 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13271 Use Old Style Figures
13275 Use True Small Caps
13278 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13281 Use Old Style Figures
13283 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13285 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13286 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13290 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13293 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13297 Use True Small Caps
13299 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13300 of scaled capitals.
13301 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13302 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13305 \begin_layout Standard
13310 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13311 a font to display the script characters.
13315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13316 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13322 \begin_inset Index idx
13325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13332 So this has no effect for the document language
13348 \begin_layout Standard
13351 Enable micro-typographic extensions
13353 activates extensions such as character protrusion and font expansion via
13354 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13360 \begin_inset Index idx
13363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13365 packages ! microtype
13373 Output en- and em-dashes as ligatures
13375 outputs en- and em-dashes as ligatures (--, ---) instead of a sigle character.
13378 \begin_layout Standard
13379 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13383 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13391 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
13396 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13397 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13399 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13401 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
13404 dialog, see section
13405 \begin_inset space ~
13409 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13411 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
13423 \begin_layout Subsection
13427 \begin_layout Standard
13428 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
13429 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
13431 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
13432 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13433 choose a math font in the dialog
13435 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13439 \begin_inset Index idx
13442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13443 Document ! Settings
13449 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
13450 automatically selects a math font.
13451 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
13452 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
13455 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13461 \begin_inset space ~
13467 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13472 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
13473 document font is available.
13476 \begin_layout Standard
13477 Note that the math font will not be used for
13481 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13487 or by the insertion of the command
13494 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13495 \begin_inset space ~
13499 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13500 while the math characters do not.
13502 \begin_inset space ~
13505 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13508 \begin_inset space ~
13516 \begin_inset space ~
13521 in the document font settings.
13524 \begin_layout Standard
13525 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
13526 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
13527 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
13528 font (in most cases
13529 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13535 \begin_inset space ~
13541 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13544 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
13545 variant of the document's class default font (in most
13547 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13553 \begin_inset space ~
13559 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13565 \begin_layout Subsection
13566 Using Different Character Styles
13567 \begin_inset Index idx
13570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13577 \begin_inset Index idx
13580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13589 \begin_layout Standard
13590 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
13591 automatically changes the character style for certain
13592 paragraph environments.
13594 supports two character styles,
13603 You can activate both of these styles via key bindings, the menus, and
13607 \begin_layout Standard
13612 style, do one of the following:
13615 \begin_layout Itemize
13616 click on the toolbar button
13625 \begin_layout Itemize
13626 use the key binding
13635 \begin_layout Standard
13636 These commands are all toggles.
13641 style is already active, they deactivate it.
13644 \begin_layout Standard
13645 One typically uses the
13649 style for proper names.
13651 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13658 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
13660 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13666 \begin_layout Standard
13667 A more widely used character style is the
13672 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
13679 \begin_layout Itemize
13680 clicking on the toolbar button
13689 \begin_layout Itemize
13690 using the keybindings
13699 \begin_layout Standard
13704 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13706 use a different font.
13709 \begin_layout Standard
13710 We've been using the
13714 style all over the place in this document.
13715 Here's one more example:
13718 \begin_layout Quotation
13721 Do not overuse character styles!
13724 \begin_layout Standard
13725 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
13726 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
13727 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
13728 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
13732 \begin_layout Standard
13733 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
13741 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13743 \begin_inset space ~
13746 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13752 arg "dialog-show character"
13758 \begin_layout Subsection
13759 Fine-Tuning with the
13764 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13766 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13771 \begin_inset Index idx
13774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13783 \begin_layout Standard
13784 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so
13786 gives you a way to create a custom character style.
13787 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
13788 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
13789 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
13790 from ordinary dialog.
13793 \begin_layout Standard
13794 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
13795 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
13796 \begin_inset Newline newline
13799 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
13800 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
13803 \begin_layout Standard
13804 To use custom character styles, open the
13806 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13808 \begin_inset space ~
13811 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13814 dialog or press the toolbar button
13817 arg "dialog-show character"
13821 There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
13822 font property that you can choose.
13823 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
13826 \begin_inset space ~
13831 , which keeps the current state of that property.
13836 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
13837 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
13838 environments all at once.
13841 \begin_layout Standard
13842 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
13845 \begin_inset space ~
13857 \begin_layout Labeling
13858 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13864 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13868 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13872 The possible options are:
13876 \begin_layout Labeling
13877 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13882 This is the Roman font family.
13883 Normally a serif font.
13884 It's also the default family.
13894 \begin_layout Labeling
13895 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13899 \begin_inset space ~
13906 This is the Sans Serif font family.
13918 \begin_layout Labeling
13919 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13926 This is the Typewriter font family.
13932 arg "font-typewriter"
13941 \begin_layout Labeling
13942 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13947 This corresponds to the print weight.
13952 \begin_layout Labeling
13953 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13958 This is the Medium font series.
13959 It's also the default series.
13962 \begin_layout Labeling
13963 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13970 This is the Bold font series.
13983 \begin_layout Labeling
13984 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13989 As the name implies.
13994 \begin_layout Labeling
13995 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14000 This is the Upright font shape.
14001 It's also the default shape.
14004 \begin_layout Labeling
14005 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14019 s the Italic font shape
14025 \begin_layout Labeling
14026 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14033 This is the Slanted font shape
14035 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
14036 , this is different from italic).
14039 \begin_layout Labeling
14040 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14044 \begin_inset space ~
14051 This is the Small caps font shape
14058 \begin_layout Labeling
14059 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14064 Alters the text color.
14065 Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
14069 \begin_inset space ~
14074 , which means that the document default color set in
14076 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14077 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
14083 \begin_inset space ~
14088 is used, you can choose between
14165 \begin_inset Index idx
14168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14177 \begin_layout Labeling
14178 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14183 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
14184 the language of the document.
14185 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
14186 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
14188 \begin_inset Newline newline
14191 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
14193 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
14194 When using the spell checking (see section
14195 \begin_inset space ~
14199 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14201 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
14205 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
14208 \begin_layout Labeling
14209 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14214 Alters the size of the font.
14215 You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually
14216 proportional to the document font size.
14217 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
14218 the details, but a general description of what
14224 \begin_layout Labeling
14225 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14233 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14237 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14246 arg "font-size tiny"
14252 \begin_layout Labeling
14253 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14261 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14265 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14274 arg "font-size scriptsize"
14280 \begin_layout Labeling
14281 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14289 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14293 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14302 arg "font-size footnotesize"
14308 \begin_layout Labeling
14309 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14317 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14321 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14330 arg "font-size small"
14336 \begin_layout Labeling
14337 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14343 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14347 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14351 It's also the default size.
14355 arg "font-size normal"
14361 \begin_layout Labeling
14362 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14370 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14374 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14383 arg "font-size large"
14389 \begin_layout Labeling
14390 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14398 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14402 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14411 arg "font-size larger"
14417 \begin_layout Labeling
14418 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14426 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14430 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14439 arg "font-size largest"
14445 \begin_layout Labeling
14446 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14454 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14458 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14467 arg "font-size huge"
14473 \begin_layout Labeling
14474 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14482 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14486 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14495 arg "font-size giant"
14501 \begin_layout Labeling
14502 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14507 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
14508 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14512 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14516 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14520 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14527 arg "font-size increase"
14533 \begin_layout Labeling
14534 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14539 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
14540 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14544 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14548 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14552 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14559 arg "font-size decrease"
14566 \begin_layout Standard
14571 : don't go crazy with this feature.
14572 You should almost never need to change the font size.
14574 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
14575 — use those instead.
14576 This is here for fine-tuning only!
14579 \begin_layout Labeling
14580 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14585 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
14590 \begin_layout Labeling
14591 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14598 This is text with emphasize on
14601 This might seem like the same as
14605 , but it is actually a bit different.
14611 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
14613 Normally this font is equal to italic.
14616 \begin_layout Labeling
14617 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14624 This is text with Underbar on.
14630 arg "font-underline"
14636 \begin_inset Newline newline
14641 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
14642 when you could not change fonts.
14643 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
14644 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
14645 because some people
14649 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
14652 \begin_layout Labeling
14653 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14657 \begin_inset space ~
14664 This is text with Double underbar on.
14670 arg "font-underunderline"
14674 \begin_inset Newline newline
14677 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
14678 about double underbar.
14681 \begin_layout Labeling
14682 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14686 \begin_inset space ~
14693 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
14699 arg "font-underwave"
14703 \begin_inset Newline newline
14706 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
14707 Keep antinausea pills handy.
14710 \begin_layout Labeling
14711 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14715 \begin_inset space ~
14722 This is text with Strikeout on.
14728 arg "font-strikeout"
14732 \begin_inset Newline newline
14735 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
14736 changed in the meantime.
14739 \begin_layout Labeling
14740 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14744 \begin_inset space ~
14751 This is text with Cross out on.
14754 \begin_inset Newline newline
14757 This is used to make text hardly readable.
14760 \begin_layout Labeling
14761 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14768 This is text with Noun on.
14775 , this is a logical attribute.
14776 Normally it's equivalent to
14779 \begin_inset space ~
14788 \begin_layout Standard
14789 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
14790 Once you have chosen a new character style via the
14792 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14794 \begin_inset space ~
14797 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14803 arg "dialog-show character"
14806 ) dialog, the settings are saved.
14807 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
14810 arg "textstyle-apply"
14814 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog
14818 \begin_layout Standard
14819 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
14826 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
14827 (suppose you just set the shape to
14828 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14832 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14836 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14840 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14846 \begin_inset space ~
14858 \begin_layout Standard
14859 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
14867 \begin_inset space ~
14879 \begin_layout Itemize
14885 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14889 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14892 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14893 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14897 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14901 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14905 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14910 \begin_inset Newline newline
14914 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14928 \begin_inset Note Note
14931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14932 For more on phantoms see section
14933 \begin_inset space ~
14937 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14939 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
14949 \begin_inset Newline newline
14955 \begin_layout Itemize
14960 fonts use characters with serifs.
14961 These are the small
14962 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14966 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14969 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
14970 The following example shows the difference:
14971 \begin_inset Newline newline
14975 \begin_inset Newline newline
14980 text without serifs
14983 \begin_inset Newline newline
14986 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
14987 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
14994 \begin_layout Itemize
14999 is not recommended for use as a base type.
15000 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
15001 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
15004 \begin_layout Standard
15005 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15009 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15012 refers to applying or removing font properties.
15013 When a property is marked for toggling in the
15016 \begin_inset space ~
15021 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
15022 the property to be removed.
15023 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
15024 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
15025 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
15028 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15032 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15036 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15040 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15043 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
15044 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
15045 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15049 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15052 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
15056 \begin_inset space ~
15061 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
15064 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15068 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15072 If you, for example, set
15073 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15077 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15081 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15085 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15091 \begin_inset space ~
15096 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
15098 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15102 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15105 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
15108 \begin_layout Standard
15109 We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts!
15110 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
15113 \begin_layout Section
15114 Printing and Previewing
15117 \begin_layout Subsection
15121 \begin_layout Standard
15122 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
15123 using \SpecialChar LyX
15124 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
15125 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
15126 goes on behind-the-scenes.
15127 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
15129 Additional Features
15134 \begin_layout Standard
15136 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
15139 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
15140 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
15141 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
15144 is what you use to do your actual writing.
15145 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
15146 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15147 to turn your writing into printable output.
15148 This happens in two stages:
15151 \begin_layout Enumerate
15152 First, \SpecialChar LyX
15153 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
15155 a file with the extension,
15156 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15164 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15170 \begin_layout Enumerate
15171 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
15172 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15173 to use the commands in the
15177 file to produce printable output.
15180 \begin_layout Subsection
15181 Output file formats
15182 \begin_inset Index idx
15185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15192 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15194 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
15201 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15202 Simple text (ASCII)
15203 \begin_inset Index idx
15206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15207 File formats ! ASCII
15215 \begin_layout Standard
15216 This file type has the extension
15217 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15225 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15229 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
15230 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15233 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
15234 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15240 \begin_layout Standard
15241 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
15243 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15244 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15246 \begin_inset space ~
15252 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
15253 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
15254 bibliography (section
15255 \begin_inset space ~
15259 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15261 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
15266 If your document includes such material, use
15268 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15269 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15271 \begin_inset space ~
15275 \begin_inset space ~
15279 \begin_inset space ~
15287 \begin_inset space ~
15291 \begin_inset space ~
15297 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
15298 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
15301 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15304 \begin_inset Index idx
15307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15308 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
15317 \begin_layout Standard
15318 This file type has the extension
15319 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15327 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15330 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15333 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
15334 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
15335 -Errors or to process it manually
15336 with console commands.
15337 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
15338 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
15339 's temporary directory whenever you
15340 view or export your document.
15343 \begin_layout Standard
15344 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
15345 -file using the menu
15347 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15348 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15352 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
15353 export variants are explained in section
15354 \begin_inset space ~
15358 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15360 reference "subsec:Export"
15367 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15369 \begin_inset Index idx
15372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15381 \begin_layout Standard
15382 This file type has the extension
15383 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15391 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15396 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15400 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15403 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
15404 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
15405 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
15409 \begin_layout Standard
15410 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
15411 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
15412 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
15413 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
15414 when you view the DVI.
15415 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
15418 \begin_layout Standard
15419 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
15421 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15422 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15427 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15428 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15430 \begin_inset space ~
15436 The latter option uses the program
15438 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15444 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15447 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15448 font access (see section
15449 \begin_inset space ~
15453 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15455 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15460 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15461 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15466 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15468 \begin_inset Index idx
15471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15472 File formats ! PostScript
15480 \begin_layout Standard
15481 This file type has the extension
15482 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15490 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15494 PostScript was developed by the company
15498 as a printer language.
15499 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
15501 PostScript can be seen as a
15502 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15505 programming language
15506 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15509 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
15513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15514 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15521 \begin_inset Index idx
15524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15526 packages ! pstricks
15536 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
15539 \begin_layout Standard
15540 PostScript can only contain images in the format
15541 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15544 Encapsulated PostScript
15545 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15548 (EPS, file extension
15549 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15557 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15561 As \SpecialChar LyX
15562 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
15563 convert them in the background to EPS.
15564 If, for example, you have 50
15565 \begin_inset space ~
15568 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
15570 \begin_inset space ~
15573 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
15574 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
15576 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
15577 EPS to avoid this problem.
15580 \begin_layout Standard
15581 You can export to PostScript using the menu
15583 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15584 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15590 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15592 \begin_inset Index idx
15595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15602 \begin_inset Index idx
15605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15614 \begin_layout Standard
15615 This file type has the extension
15616 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15624 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15629 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15632 Portable Document Format
15633 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15640 was derived from PostScript.
15641 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
15643 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15647 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15650 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
15651 looks exactly the same.
15654 \begin_layout Standard
15655 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
15656 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15659 Joint Photographic Experts Group
15660 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15663 (JPG, file extension
15664 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15672 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15676 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15684 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15688 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15691 Portable Network Graphics
15692 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15695 (PNG, file extension
15696 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15704 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15708 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
15709 converts them in the
15710 background to one of these formats.
15711 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
15712 will slow down your workflow.
15713 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
15716 \begin_layout Standard
15717 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
15719 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15725 \begin_layout Description
15727 \begin_inset space ~
15730 (pdflatex) This uses the program
15734 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15737 \begin_layout Description
15739 \begin_inset space ~
15746 ) This uses the program
15748 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15751 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15754 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15757 is a new engine, derived from
15761 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
15762 access (see section
15763 \begin_inset space ~
15767 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15769 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15774 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15775 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15780 \begin_layout Description
15782 \begin_inset space ~
15789 ) This uses the program
15794 that converts your file directly to PDF.
15800 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15801 font access (see section
15802 \begin_inset space ~
15806 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15808 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15813 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
15814 vertically written Japanese.
15817 \begin_layout Description
15819 \begin_inset space ~
15822 (cropped) This is the same as
15825 \begin_inset space ~
15830 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
15831 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
15832 to generate good-looking
15833 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
15836 \begin_layout Description
15838 \begin_inset space ~
15841 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
15845 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
15849 \begin_layout Description
15851 \begin_inset space ~
15854 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
15858 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
15859 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
15863 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
15864 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
15867 \begin_layout Standard
15871 \begin_inset space ~
15880 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
15881 works without problems.
15882 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
15883 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
15887 \begin_inset space ~
15895 \begin_inset space ~
15900 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
15908 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15910 \begin_inset Index idx
15913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15914 FileFormats ! XHTML
15920 \begin_inset Index idx
15923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15932 \begin_layout Standard
15933 This file type has the extension
15934 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15942 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15946 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
15947 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
15948 When \SpecialChar LyX
15949 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
15950 suitable for the purpose.
15951 For the math output you can choose in the menu
15953 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15954 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
15957 between different formats, which are described in section
15959 Math Output in XHTML
15964 \begin_inset space ~
15972 \begin_layout Standard
15973 XHTML output remains
15974 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15978 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15981 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
15982 features are supported yet.
15986 and the World Wide Web
15990 Additional Features
15992 manual, for more information.
15995 \begin_layout Standard
15996 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
15998 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15999 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16005 \begin_layout Subsection
16007 \begin_inset Index idx
16010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16019 \begin_layout Standard
16020 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
16021 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
16030 or use the toolbar button
16037 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
16038 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see section
16039 \begin_inset space ~
16043 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16045 reference "sec:File-Formats"
16049 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
16051 \begin_inset space ~
16055 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16057 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
16062 Further output formats can be selected via
16064 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16065 View (Other Formats)
16067 or the toolbar button
16076 \begin_layout Standard
16077 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
16078 viewer window using the menu
16080 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16085 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16086 Update (Other Formats)
16091 \begin_layout Standard
16092 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
16095 To have a real output, export your document.
16098 \begin_layout Section
16099 A few Words about Typography
16100 \begin_inset Index idx
16103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16112 \begin_layout Subsection
16113 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
16114 \begin_inset Index idx
16117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16124 \begin_inset Index idx
16127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16136 \begin_layout Standard
16137 In \SpecialChar LyX
16139 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16147 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16150 symbol comes in four variants: the
16167 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16173 \begin_layout Standard
16174 \begin_inset Box Frameless
16184 height_special "totalheight"
16189 backgroundcolor "none"
16192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16193 \begin_inset Tabular
16194 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
16195 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
16196 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
16197 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16198 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16199 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16200 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16209 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16228 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16229 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16238 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16247 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16251 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16259 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16268 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16269 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16278 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16291 system key combination
16295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16296 On Mac and Linux, the en dash is entered with
16299 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16303 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16308 and the em dash with
16311 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16315 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16324 is the Mac label for the right
16333 Alternatively, dashes can be inserted with
16335 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16337 \begin_inset space ~
16340 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16344 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16348 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16352 function with the Unicode code point as argument (2013 for the em dash
16353 and 2014 for the en dash).
16359 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16363 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16372 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16373 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16382 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16391 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16395 system key combination or
16396 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16400 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16410 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16419 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16423 \begin_inset Formula $-$
16431 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16435 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16443 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16462 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16468 \begin_layout Standard
16469 Dashes can also be inserted with
16471 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16473 \begin_inset space ~
16476 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16480 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16484 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16491 \begin_layout Standard
16492 Hyphen and dashes are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in math
16493 mode and has a length of its own.
16494 Here are some examples:
16497 \begin_layout Enumerate
16498 line- and page-breaks
16499 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16509 \begin_layout Enumerate
16511 \begin_inset space ~
16515 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16525 \begin_layout Enumerate
16526 The em dash is used without spaces: Oh—there's a dash.
16527 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16537 \begin_layout Enumerate
16538 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
16542 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16552 \begin_layout Standard
16554 \begin_inset CommandInset href
16556 name "Wikipedia entry on dashes"
16557 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dash"
16565 \begin_layout Subsection
16566 Dashes and line breaks
16567 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16569 name "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
16576 \begin_layout Standard
16577 Whether line breaks around dashes are allowed depends on the use case and
16581 \begin_layout Itemize
16582 In English, line breaks are generally allowed after the dash in ranges of
16583 values such as 1975–1982, but no line break should occur if only a single
16584 character follows the dash (as in A–Z).
16587 \begin_layout Itemize
16588 In English, dashes used to set off parenthetical statements should not start
16592 \begin_layout Itemize
16593 In French and Spanish, dashes around parenthetical statements are treated
16594 similar to brackets: line breaks are not allowed on the inner side.
16597 \begin_layout Standard
16598 In \SpecialChar LyX
16599 , line breaks after en-dashes and em-dashes are only allowed (without
16600 manual intervention), if the option
16602 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16603 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
16604 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
16605 Output en- and em-dashes as ligatures
16607 is selected (this is the default in \SpecialChar LyX
16612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16613 In this case, the dashes are output as
16614 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16618 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16622 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16626 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16629 , respectively, when exporting to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16631 The \SpecialChar TeX
16632 font ligature mechanism converts them to dash characters followed
16633 by an optional line break.
16641 \begin_layout Standard
16645 \begin_layout Enumerate
16646 This results in optional line breaks after
16651 Unwanted line breaks must be prevented by wrapping in a makebox
16655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16658 Prevent Hyphenation
16663 \begin_inset space ~
16673 , using protected spaces or preceding with
16679 in \SpecialChar TeX
16685 \begin_layout Itemize
16687 \begin_inset space ~
16691 \begin_inset Box Frameless
16701 height_special "totalheight"
16706 backgroundcolor "none"
16709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16718 \begin_layout Itemize
16719 With spaced en dashes
16720 \begin_inset space ~
16724 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16728 in British English and generally recommended by
16730 The Elements of Typographic Style
16733 \begin_inset space ~
16736 – line breaks should not occur before the dash.
16739 \begin_layout Itemize
16743 \begin_inset space ~
16746 même si tout le monde ne les aime pas
16747 \begin_inset space ~
16750 – sont très utiles.
16753 \begin_layout Itemize
16760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16769 —un inciso con rayas— se escribe así.
16772 \begin_layout Standard
16773 An incorrect line break is easily overlooked because
16774 \begin_inset space ~
16777 – in contrast to an overfull line
16778 \begin_inset space ~
16781 – it does not trigger a warning in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16786 \begin_layout Enumerate
16787 The setting is ignored for documents using non-\SpecialChar TeX
16792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16798 XeTeXdashbreakstate
16801 The default causes dashes to behave like ligature dashes.
16802 The usual behaviour of literal dashes can be achieved by inserting
16807 XeTeXdashbreakstate=0
16810 into the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16819 \begin_layout Enumerate
16835 \begin_layout Enumerate
16836 Hyphenation is suppressed in words adjacent to hyphens and ligature dashes.
16839 \begin_layout Standard
16842 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16843 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
16844 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
16845 Output en- and em-dashes as ligatures
16847 has not been selected, you can insert optional line breaks via the menu
16850 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16851 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
16852 Optional line break
16857 \begin_layout Itemize
16858 Em-dashes without spaces—\SpecialChar allowbreak
16859 as common in American English—\SpecialChar allowbreak
16864 \begin_layout Standard
16865 As of \SpecialChar LyX
16867 \begin_inset space ~
16870 2.2, -- and --- are exported to LaTeX as -{}- and -{}-{}- to prevent ligation
16875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16876 Up to \SpecialChar LyX
16878 \begin_inset space ~
16881 2.1, -- and --- was output unchanged which led to different look in \SpecialChar LyX
16883 export, HTML export and the PDF export.
16888 Occurrences in older documents are converted to literal Unicode dashes.
16889 This led to different line breaks in some documents.
16892 \begin_inset space ~
16895 2.3 provides the aforementioned option
16897 Output en- and em-dashes as ligatures
16901 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16902 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
16906 It is on by default but unselected when opening documents edited with \SpecialChar LyX
16908 \begin_inset space ~
16912 \begin_inset Newline newline
16915 Note the following side-effects of the changes in \SpecialChar LyX
16919 \begin_layout Itemize
16920 If you used literal em- and en dashes in pre-\SpecialChar LyX
16922 \begin_inset space ~
16925 2.2 documents, you must manually unselect
16927 Output en- and em-dashes as ligatures
16929 to ensure unchanged behavior.
16933 \begin_layout Itemize
16934 If you used both, literal and ligature dashes in pre-\SpecialChar LyX
16936 \begin_inset space ~
16939 2.2 documents, you may need to enable or prevent individual line breaks as
16940 shown above to restore the correct line breaking behaviour.
16943 \begin_layout Itemize
16944 Zero-width space (ZWSP) characters in older \SpecialChar LyX
16945 documents that follow literal
16946 em- and en-dashes are removed during the conversion to the format of \SpecialChar LyX
16948 \begin_inset space ~
16952 If you used them as optional line breaks after dashes, convert them to
16953 space insets before opening your document with \SpecialChar LyX
16955 \begin_inset space ~
16958 2.3 or the optional line breaks will be lost.
16961 \begin_layout Subsection
16963 \begin_inset Index idx
16966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16973 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16975 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
16982 \begin_layout Standard
16983 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
16984 but automatically in the output.
16985 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16991 \begin_inset Index idx
16994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17001 following the rules of the document language.
17004 \begin_layout Standard
17006 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
17010 font and with unusual constructs, like
17011 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17015 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17019 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
17020 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
17021 This is done with the menu
17023 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17024 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17026 \begin_inset space ~
17032 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
17034 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
17038 \begin_layout Standard
17039 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
17040 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
17042 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17046 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17051 would then see the hyphen
17052 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17056 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17059 as a hyphenation possibility.
17060 Hyphenating at this point would look ugly.
17061 To prevent the shortcut from being hyphenated, you can use a protected
17064 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17065 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17068 ) or put it into a makebox as described in section
17070 Prevent Hyphenation
17075 \begin_inset space ~
17083 \begin_layout Subsection
17085 \begin_inset Index idx
17088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17097 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17098 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
17099 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17101 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
17108 \begin_layout Standard
17109 When \SpecialChar LyX
17110 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
17111 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
17113 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
17116 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17119 appropriate amount of space.
17120 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17123 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
17125 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
17126 gets after another word.
17129 \begin_layout Standard
17130 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
17131 not work in all cases.
17133 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17141 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17144 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
17145 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
17148 \begin_layout Standard
17149 Here are some examples of
17153 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
17156 \begin_layout Itemize
17161 \begin_layout Itemize
17166 \begin_layout Standard
17167 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
17170 \begin_layout Itemize
17172 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17176 this is too much space!
17179 \begin_layout Itemize
17184 \begin_layout Standard
17185 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
17188 \begin_layout Standard
17189 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
17192 \begin_layout Enumerate
17196 \begin_inset space ~
17201 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
17202 \begin_inset space ~
17206 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17208 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
17213 \begin_inset Index idx
17216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17217 Spaces ! inter-word
17225 \begin_layout Enumerate
17229 \begin_inset space ~
17234 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
17235 \begin_inset space ~
17239 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17241 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
17246 \begin_inset Index idx
17249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17258 \begin_layout Enumerate
17262 \begin_inset space ~
17266 \begin_inset space ~
17270 \begin_inset space ~
17277 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17279 \begin_inset space ~
17284 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
17285 This function is also bound to
17288 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
17294 \begin_layout Standard
17295 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
17298 \begin_layout Itemize
17300 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17304 \begin_inset space \space{}
17307 this is too much space!
17310 \begin_layout Itemize
17311 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
17315 \begin_layout Standard
17316 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
17317 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
17319 will take care of this.
17322 \begin_layout Standard
17323 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
17327 \begin_inset space ~
17333 feature described in the section
17335 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
17340 Additional Features
17345 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17347 \begin_inset Index idx
17350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17351 Typography ! Quotation marks
17357 \begin_inset Index idx
17360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17361 Quotation marks | see
17365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17391 \begin_layout Standard
17393 usually sets quotation marks correctly.
17394 Specifically, it will insert an opening mark at the beginning of quoted
17395 text, and use a closing mark at the end.
17397 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17401 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17405 The keyboard character,
17409 , generates this automatically.
17412 \begin_layout Standard
17413 You can specify what character the
17417 key produces by using the submenu
17423 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17427 \begin_inset Index idx
17430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17431 Document ! Settings
17436 dialog and switching the
17440 (note that \SpecialChar LyX
17441 makes a sensible proposal for the selected main language).
17443 \begin_inset space ~
17449 \begin_layout Labeling
17450 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17454 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17458 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17462 \begin_inset space ~
17466 \begin_inset space ~
17470 \begin_inset Quotes els
17474 \begin_inset Quotes ers
17480 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17484 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17488 \begin_inset Quotes els
17492 \begin_inset Quotes ers
17495 quotation marks (as common, e.
17496 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17502 \begin_layout Labeling
17503 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17506 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17510 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17514 \begin_inset space ~
17518 \begin_inset space ~
17522 \begin_inset Quotes sls
17526 \begin_inset Quotes srs
17532 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17536 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17540 \begin_inset Quotes sls
17544 \begin_inset Quotes srs
17547 quotation marks (as common, e.
17548 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17554 \begin_layout Labeling
17555 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17558 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17562 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17566 \begin_inset space ~
17570 \begin_inset space ~
17574 \begin_inset Quotes gls
17578 \begin_inset Quotes grs
17584 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17588 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17592 \begin_inset Quotes gls
17596 \begin_inset Quotes grs
17599 quotation marks (as common, e.
17600 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17606 \begin_layout Labeling
17607 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17610 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17614 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17618 \begin_inset space ~
17622 \begin_inset space ~
17626 \begin_inset Quotes pls
17630 \begin_inset Quotes prs
17636 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17640 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17644 \begin_inset Quotes pls
17648 \begin_inset Quotes prs
17651 quotation marks (as common, e.
17652 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17658 \begin_layout Labeling
17659 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17662 \begin_inset Quotes cld
17666 \begin_inset Quotes crd
17670 \begin_inset space ~
17674 \begin_inset space ~
17678 \begin_inset Quotes cls
17682 \begin_inset Quotes crs
17688 \begin_inset Quotes cld
17692 \begin_inset Quotes crd
17696 \begin_inset Quotes cls
17700 \begin_inset Quotes crs
17703 quotation marks (as common, e.
17704 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17707 g., in Switzerland)
17710 \begin_layout Labeling
17711 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17714 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17718 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17722 \begin_inset space ~
17726 \begin_inset space ~
17730 \begin_inset Quotes als
17734 \begin_inset Quotes ars
17740 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17744 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17748 \begin_inset Quotes als
17752 \begin_inset Quotes ars
17755 quotation marks (as common, e.
17756 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17762 \begin_layout Labeling
17763 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17766 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17770 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17774 \begin_inset space ~
17778 \begin_inset space ~
17782 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17786 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17792 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17796 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17800 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17804 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17807 quotation marks (so-called plain or non-typographical quotation marks)
17810 \begin_layout Labeling
17811 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17814 \begin_inset Quotes bld
17818 \begin_inset Quotes brd
17822 \begin_inset space ~
17826 \begin_inset space ~
17830 \begin_inset Quotes bls
17834 \begin_inset Quotes brs
17840 \begin_inset Quotes bld
17844 \begin_inset Quotes brd
17848 \begin_inset Quotes bls
17852 \begin_inset Quotes brs
17855 quotation marks (as common, e.
17856 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17859 g., in Great Britain)
17862 \begin_layout Labeling
17863 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17866 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17870 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17874 \begin_inset space ~
17878 \begin_inset space ~
17882 \begin_inset Quotes fls
17886 \begin_inset Quotes frs
17892 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17896 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17900 \begin_inset Quotes fls
17904 \begin_inset Quotes frs
17907 quotation marks (as common, e.
17908 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17914 \begin_layout Labeling
17915 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17918 \begin_inset Quotes ild
17922 \begin_inset Quotes ird
17926 \begin_inset space ~
17930 \begin_inset space ~
17934 \begin_inset Quotes ils
17938 \begin_inset Quotes irs
17944 \begin_inset Quotes ild
17948 \begin_inset Quotes ird
17952 \begin_inset Quotes ils
17956 \begin_inset Quotes irs
17959 quotation marks (another style common in France)
17963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17964 Maybe you wonder why one does not simply use only outer marks in this case,
17965 since these look identical to the inner marks.
17966 The answer is that you cannot easily switch to another style then (where
17967 the inner marks differ).
17975 \begin_layout Labeling
17976 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17979 \begin_inset Quotes rld
17983 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
17987 \begin_inset space ~
17991 \begin_inset space ~
17995 \begin_inset Quotes rls
17999 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
18005 \begin_inset Quotes rld
18009 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
18013 \begin_inset Quotes rls
18017 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
18020 quotation marks (as common, e.
18021 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18027 \begin_layout Labeling
18028 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18031 \begin_inset Quotes wld
18035 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
18039 \begin_inset space ~
18043 \begin_inset space ~
18047 \begin_inset Quotes wls
18051 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
18057 \begin_inset Quotes wld
18061 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
18065 \begin_inset Quotes wls
18069 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
18072 quotation marks (another style common in Sweden)
18075 \begin_layout Labeling
18076 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18077 \begin_inset Quotes jld
18085 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
18091 \begin_inset space ~
18095 \begin_inset space ~
18101 \begin_inset Quotes jls
18109 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
18113 \begin_inset Quotes jld
18117 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
18121 \begin_inset Quotes jls
18125 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
18128 quotation marks (as common, e.
18129 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18137 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
18138 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
18146 \begin_layout Labeling
18147 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18148 \begin_inset Quotes kld
18156 \begin_inset Quotes krd
18162 \begin_inset space ~
18166 \begin_inset space ~
18172 \begin_inset Quotes kls
18180 \begin_inset Quotes krs
18184 \begin_inset Quotes kld
18188 \begin_inset Quotes krd
18192 \begin_inset Quotes kls
18196 \begin_inset Quotes krs
18199 quotation marks (as common, e.
18200 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18203 g., in North Korea and China)
18207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18208 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
18209 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
18217 \begin_layout Standard
18218 Inner quotation marks
18222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18223 In many writing cultures, these are single quotation marks.
18224 But as the British and French styles show, this is not necessarily the
18225 case (and specifically the British style shows that
18226 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18230 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18233 does not necessarily mean
18234 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18238 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18242 This is why we call them
18243 \begin_inset Quotes els
18247 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18251 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18255 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18263 for quotations inside quotations (and other tasks in some languages, such
18265 \begin_inset Quotes els
18269 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18272 ) can be obtained by means of the shortcut
18275 arg "quote-insert inner"
18280 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18286 \begin_layout Standard
18287 By default, the quotation mark styles are persistent.
18288 That is to say, a quotation mark maintains the style that was current when
18289 it was inserted, even if the document-wide style changes.
18290 This allows you to enter marks of different style.
18291 If you check the setting
18293 Use dynamic quotation marks
18297 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18298 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18301 , however, special quotation marks will be inserted (in the LyX window,
18302 they appear in a special color).
18303 These marks will automatically adapt to the main style (and its changes).
18304 Such quotation marks make it easy to alter the quotation mark style in
18306 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18309 g., if your publisher requests a different style).
18312 \begin_layout Standard
18313 Individual quotation marks (i.
18314 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18317 e., their level [inner, outer], side [opening, closing], and style) can be
18318 easily switched by a context menu that pops up if you right-click on a
18322 \begin_layout Subsection
18324 \begin_inset Index idx
18327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18328 Typography ! Ligatures
18334 \begin_inset Index idx
18337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18366 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18368 name "subsec:Ligatures"
18375 \begin_layout Standard
18376 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
18377 print them as single characters.
18378 These groups are known as
18383 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
18384 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
18386 Here are the standard ligatures:
18389 \begin_layout Itemize
18393 \begin_layout Itemize
18397 \begin_layout Itemize
18401 \begin_layout Itemize
18405 \begin_layout Itemize
18409 \begin_layout Standard
18410 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
18413 \begin_layout Standard
18414 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
18415 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
18416 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18420 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18423 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
18424 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18428 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18432 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18436 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18439 To break a ligature, use
18441 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18442 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18444 \begin_inset space ~
18451 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18455 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18459 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18462 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
18464 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18468 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18472 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18476 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18479 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
18481 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18487 \begin_layout Subsection
18489 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
18491 \begin_inset Index idx
18494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18504 \begin_layout Standard
18507 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18508 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
18512 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
18515 \begin_layout Description
18517 The name of the game.
18520 \begin_layout Description
18522 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
18526 \begin_layout Description
18528 The \SpecialChar TeX
18529 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
18533 \begin_layout Description
18534 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
18535 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
18539 \begin_layout Standard
18540 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18542 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18546 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
18550 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18554 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
18555 world to give programs geek version numbers.
18556 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
18557 converges to the number
18558 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
18561 : The actual version is
18562 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18567 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18570 , the previous one was
18571 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18576 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18582 \begin_layout Subsection
18584 \begin_inset Index idx
18587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18596 \begin_layout Standard
18597 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
18598 space between two words.
18599 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
18602 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18606 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18609 for units use the menu
18611 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18612 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18614 \begin_inset space ~
18622 arg "space-insert thin"
18628 \begin_layout Standard
18629 Here is an example to show the differences:
18632 \begin_layout Standard
18633 \begin_inset Tabular
18634 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
18635 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
18636 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18637 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18639 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18644 \begin_inset space ~
18648 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
18656 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18660 space between number and unit
18667 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18672 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18676 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
18684 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18688 half space between number and unit
18701 \begin_layout Subsection
18703 \begin_inset Index idx
18706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18707 Typography ! Widows and orphans
18715 \begin_layout Standard
18716 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
18718 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
18719 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
18720 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
18721 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
18722 These bits of text became known as
18733 \begin_layout Standard
18734 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
18735 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
18736 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
18737 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
18738 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
18739 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
18740 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
18741 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
18742 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
18743 \begin_inset Newline newline
18751 \begin_inset Newline newline
18759 \begin_inset Newline newline
18762 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18763 preamble of your document to avoid them.
18764 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
18766 \begin_inset space ~
18770 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
18772 key "latexcompanion"
18778 \begin_inset space ~
18782 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
18789 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
18790 's page break mechanism.
18793 \begin_layout Chapter
18794 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
18795 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18797 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
18804 \begin_layout Standard
18805 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
18808 \begin_inset space ~
18814 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
18817 \begin_layout Section
18819 \begin_inset Index idx
18822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18829 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18838 \begin_layout Standard
18840 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
18843 \begin_layout Description
18846 \begin_inset space ~
18849 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
18850 \begin_inset Newline newline
18854 \begin_inset Note Note
18857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18858 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
18866 \begin_layout Description
18867 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
18868 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
18869 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18872 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
18873 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
18875 \begin_inset space ~
18881 \begin_inset Newline newline
18885 \begin_inset Note Comment
18888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18889 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
18898 \begin_layout Description
18900 \begin_inset space ~
18903 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
18904 set in the document settings under
18906 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
18908 \begin_inset space ~
18914 \begin_inset Newline newline
18918 \begin_inset Newline newline
18922 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
18925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18931 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
18932 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
18937 of a comment that appears in the output.
18943 \begin_inset Newline newline
18947 \begin_inset Newline newline
18950 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
18953 \begin_layout Standard
18954 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
18962 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18966 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
18969 \begin_layout Section
18971 \begin_inset Index idx
18974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18981 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18983 name "sec:Footnotes"
18990 \begin_layout Standard
18992 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
18995 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18998 or the toolbar button
19001 arg "footnote-insert"
19013 \begin_inset Graphics
19014 filename clipart/footnote.png
19023 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
19024 's representation of your footnote.
19034 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19042 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19053 label, the box will
19057 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
19058 Clicking on the box label again will close
19071 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
19072 and click on the footnote
19087 \begin_layout Standard
19088 Here is an example footnote:
19096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19097 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
19105 \begin_layout Standard
19106 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
19107 position where the footnote box is placed.
19108 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
19109 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
19110 according to the document class.
19112 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
19113 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
19119 ey are described in the
19122 \begin_inset space ~
19130 \begin_layout Section
19132 \begin_inset Index idx
19135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19142 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19144 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
19151 \begin_layout Standard
19152 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
19154 When you insert a margin note via the menu
19156 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19158 \begin_inset space ~
19163 or the toolbar button
19166 arg "marginalnote-insert"
19185 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19189 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19192 appearing within your text.
19193 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
19194 's representation of your margin
19203 \begin_layout Standard
19204 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
19208 \begin_inset Marginal
19211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19213 This is a marginal note.
19221 \begin_layout Standard
19222 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
19223 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
19224 pages, right on odd pages.
19227 \begin_layout Standard
19228 For further information about marginal notes see the section
19231 \begin_inset space ~
19239 \begin_inset space ~
19247 \begin_layout Section
19248 Graphics and Images
19249 \begin_inset Index idx
19252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19259 \begin_inset Index idx
19262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19269 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19271 name "sec:Graphics"
19278 \begin_layout Standard
19279 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
19280 you want and click on the toolbar icon
19283 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
19288 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19292 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
19295 \begin_layout Standard
19296 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
19301 tab allows you to choose your image file.
19302 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
19304 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
19305 \begin_inset space ~
19309 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19311 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
19318 \begin_layout Standard
19323 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
19324 of the image in the output.
19325 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
19329 \begin_inset space ~
19333 \begin_inset space ~
19342 \begin_inset space ~
19346 \begin_inset space ~
19350 \begin_inset space ~
19355 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
19356 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
19364 \begin_layout Standard
19368 \begin_inset space ~
19372 \begin_inset space ~
19377 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
19378 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
19380 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
19385 \begin_inset space ~
19390 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
19391 with the image size is printed.
19394 \begin_layout Standard
19395 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
19396 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
19398 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
19401 \begin_layout Standard
19403 \begin_inset Graphics
19404 filename clipart/2D-intensity-plot.pdf
19412 \begin_layout Standard
19413 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
19414 the image into a float, see section
19415 \begin_inset space ~
19419 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19421 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
19428 \begin_layout Subsection
19430 \begin_inset Index idx
19433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19440 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19442 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
19449 \begin_layout Standard
19450 You can insert images in any known file format.
19451 But as we explained in section
19452 \begin_inset space ~
19456 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19458 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
19462 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
19464 therefore uses the program
19468 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
19469 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
19470 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
19471 \begin_inset space ~
19475 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19477 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
19484 \begin_layout Standard
19485 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
19488 \begin_layout Description
19490 \begin_inset space ~
19493 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
19494 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
19495 Well-known bitmap image formats are
19496 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19499 Graphics Interchange Format
19500 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19503 (GIF, file extension
19504 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19512 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19516 \begin_inset Index idx
19519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19548 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19551 Portable Network Graphics
19552 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19555 (PNG, file extension
19556 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19564 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19568 \begin_inset Index idx
19571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19600 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19603 Joint Photographic Experts Group
19604 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19607 (JPG, file extension
19608 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19616 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19620 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19628 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19632 \begin_inset Index idx
19635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19666 \begin_layout Description
19668 \begin_inset space ~
19671 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
19673 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
19674 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
19675 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
19676 \begin_inset Newline newline
19679 Scalable image formats can be
19680 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19683 Scalable Vector Graphics
19684 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19687 (SVG, file extension
19688 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19696 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19700 \begin_inset Index idx
19703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19732 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19735 Encapsulated PostScript
19736 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19739 (EPS, file extension
19740 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19748 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19752 \begin_inset Index idx
19755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19784 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19787 Portable Document Format
19788 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19791 (PDF, file extension
19792 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19800 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19804 \begin_inset Index idx
19807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19815 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19819 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19822 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
19823 result will not be scalable.
19824 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
19829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19830 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
19838 \begin_layout Standard
19839 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
19846 \begin_layout Subsection
19847 Grouping of Image Settings
19848 \begin_inset Index idx
19851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19852 Images ! Settings grouping
19860 \begin_layout Standard
19861 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
19863 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
19864 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
19866 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
19867 need to manually change each of them.
19871 \begin_layout Standard
19872 A new group can be set by pressing the button
19875 \begin_inset space ~
19879 \begin_inset space ~
19891 \begin_inset space ~
19895 \begin_inset space ~
19901 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
19902 and checking the name of the desired group.
19905 \begin_layout Section
19907 \begin_inset Index idx
19910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19917 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19926 \begin_layout Standard
19927 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
19930 arg "tabular-insert"
19935 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19939 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
19940 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
19941 from the rest of the table.
19942 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
19943 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
19945 Here is an example table:
19948 \begin_layout Standard
19950 \begin_inset Tabular
19951 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
19952 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
19953 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19954 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19955 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
19956 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19958 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19967 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19985 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19994 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20005 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20023 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20032 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20041 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20052 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20070 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20092 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20103 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20121 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20130 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20139 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20156 \begin_layout Subsection
20160 \begin_layout Standard
20161 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
20164 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
20168 This brings up the table dialog.
20169 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
20170 cursor is placed currently.
20171 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
20172 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
20173 done on all of your selection.
20176 \begin_layout Standard
20177 In addition to the table dialog, the
20180 \begin_inset space ~
20185 helps you in setting table properties.
20186 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
20189 \begin_layout Standard
20193 \begin_inset space ~
20198 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
20199 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
20200 current cell respectively.
20201 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
20203 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
20204 of text, see section
20205 \begin_inset space ~
20209 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20211 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
20218 \begin_layout Standard
20219 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
20220 using the check box
20229 This will merge the cells to
20233 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
20234 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
20235 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
20236 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
20237 in the last row without the upper border:
20240 \begin_layout Standard
20242 \begin_inset Tabular
20243 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
20244 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
20245 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20246 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
20247 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
20248 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20250 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20259 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20268 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20277 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20288 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20306 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20315 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20324 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20335 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20344 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20353 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20362 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20379 \begin_layout Standard
20380 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
20381 -arguments for the table.
20382 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
20383 explained in the chapter
20390 \begin_inset space ~
20396 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
20397 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
20398 but are visible in the output.
20401 \begin_layout Standard
20402 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
20405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20410 Most DVI-viewers are
20414 able to display rotations.
20422 \begin_layout Standard
20427 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
20432 adds lines for all cell borders.
20435 \begin_layout Subsection
20437 \begin_inset Index idx
20440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20441 Tables ! Multi-page
20447 \begin_inset Index idx
20450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20459 \begin_layout Standard
20460 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
20463 \begin_inset space ~
20467 \begin_inset space ~
20475 \begin_inset space ~
20480 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
20481 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
20484 \begin_layout Description
20489 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
20490 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
20491 Except for the first page, if
20494 \begin_inset space ~
20502 \begin_layout Description
20506 \begin_inset space ~
20511 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
20512 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
20515 \begin_layout Description
20520 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
20521 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
20522 except for the last page, if
20525 \begin_inset space ~
20533 \begin_layout Description
20537 \begin_inset space ~
20542 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
20543 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
20546 \begin_layout Description
20547 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
20548 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
20550 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20554 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
20557 \begin_inset space ~
20565 \begin_layout Standard
20566 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
20567 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
20568 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
20574 In this context, first means first in this order:
20577 \begin_inset space ~
20589 \begin_inset space ~
20594 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
20597 \begin_layout Standard
20599 \begin_inset Tabular
20600 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
20601 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
20602 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
20603 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20604 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20605 <row endfirsthead="true">
20606 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20612 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
20617 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20626 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20636 <row endfirsthead="true">
20637 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20648 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20657 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20669 <row endhead="true">
20670 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20681 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20690 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20700 <row endhead="true">
20701 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20712 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20721 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20733 <row endfoot="true">
20734 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20745 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20754 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20765 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20776 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20785 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20796 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20807 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20816 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20827 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20838 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20847 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20858 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20869 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20878 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20889 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20900 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20909 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20920 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20931 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20940 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20951 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20962 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20971 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20982 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20993 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21002 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21013 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21024 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21033 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21044 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21055 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21064 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21075 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21095 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21106 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21117 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21126 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21148 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21157 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21168 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21179 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21188 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21199 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21219 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21230 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21241 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21250 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21261 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21272 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21281 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21292 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21312 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21323 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21343 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21365 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21374 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21385 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21396 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21405 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21416 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21427 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21436 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21447 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21458 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21467 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21478 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21489 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21498 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21509 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21520 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21529 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21540 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21551 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21560 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21571 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21582 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21602 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21613 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21633 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21644 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21653 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21664 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21675 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21684 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21695 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21706 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21715 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21726 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21735 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
21738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21744 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21755 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21766 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21775 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21786 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21797 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21806 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21817 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21828 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21837 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21848 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21859 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21868 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21879 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21890 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21899 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21910 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21921 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21930 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21941 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21961 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21972 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21983 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21992 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22003 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22014 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22023 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22034 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22045 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22054 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22065 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22076 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22085 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22096 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22107 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22116 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22127 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22138 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22147 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22158 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22169 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22178 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22189 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22200 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22209 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22220 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22231 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22240 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22251 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22262 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22271 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22282 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22293 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22302 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22313 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22324 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22333 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22344 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22355 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22364 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22375 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22386 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22395 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22406 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22417 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22426 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22437 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22448 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22457 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22468 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22479 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22488 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22499 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22510 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22519 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22530 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22541 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22561 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22572 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22581 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22592 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22603 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22612 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22623 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22634 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22643 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22654 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22665 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22674 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22685 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22696 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22705 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22715 <row endlastfoot="true">
22716 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22727 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
22730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22736 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22753 \begin_layout Subsection
22755 \begin_inset Index idx
22758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22765 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22767 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
22774 \begin_layout Standard
22775 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
22776 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
22777 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
22778 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
22782 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
22785 \begin_layout Standard
22786 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
22787 for the column in the table dialog.
22788 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
22789 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
22793 \begin_layout Standard
22795 \begin_inset Tabular
22796 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
22797 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
22798 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22799 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
22800 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22802 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22820 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22838 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22858 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22876 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22889 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
22894 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22914 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22932 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22945 This is longer now.
22950 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22970 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23001 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
23002 This is longer now.
23007 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23033 \begin_layout Standard
23034 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
23035 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
23039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23040 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
23041 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
23047 Selection with the mouse or with
23051 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
23052 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
23053 the selection from outside the table.
23056 \begin_layout Section
23058 \begin_inset Index idx
23061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23068 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23077 \begin_layout Subsection
23081 \begin_layout Standard
23082 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
23083 have a fixed location.
23085 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23089 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23092 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
23100 \begin_inset space ~
23105 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
23106 too many notes on the current page.
23109 \begin_layout Standard
23110 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
23111 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
23112 and pages without text.
23113 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
23114 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
23115 Floats are therefore numbered.
23116 Referencing is described in section
23117 \begin_inset space ~
23121 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23123 reference "sec:Cross-References"
23130 \begin_layout Standard
23131 To insert a float, use the menu
23133 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23137 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
23138 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
23140 After the label you can insert the caption text.
23141 \begin_inset Index idx
23144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23150 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
23151 paragraph within the float.
23152 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
23153 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
23154 left-clicking on the box label.
23155 A closed float box looks like this:
23156 \begin_inset Graphics
23157 filename clipart/float.png
23162 – a gray button with a red label.
23165 \begin_layout Standard
23166 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
23168 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
23171 \begin_layout Subsection
23173 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23175 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
23180 \begin_inset Index idx
23183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23184 Floats ! Figure floats
23192 \begin_layout Standard
23194 \begin_inset space ~
23198 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23200 reference "fig:A-star-in"
23204 was created using the menu
23206 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23207 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
23213 arg "float-insert figure"
23217 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
23220 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23226 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
23230 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
23231 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
23233 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
23235 \begin_inset space ~
23243 arg "layout-paragraph"
23249 \begin_layout Standard
23250 \begin_inset Float figure
23255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23257 \begin_inset Graphics
23258 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
23267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23268 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23271 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23273 name "fig:A-star-in"
23290 \begin_layout Standard
23291 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
23292 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
23294 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23303 ) and refer to it using the menu
23305 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23311 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
23315 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
23316 vague references like
23317 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23321 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23324 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
23325 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
23327 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23331 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23335 For more about cross-references, see section
23336 \begin_inset space ~
23340 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23342 reference "sec:Cross-References"
23349 \begin_layout Standard
23350 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
23351 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
23352 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
23353 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
23354 as described in section
23355 \begin_inset space ~
23359 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23361 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
23367 \begin_inset space ~
23371 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23373 reference "fig:Two-images"
23377 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
23378 You can also set the images one below the other.
23380 \begin_inset space ~
23384 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23386 reference "fig:Undefinable"
23391 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23393 reference "fig:Star"
23397 are the subfigures.
23400 \begin_layout Standard
23401 \begin_inset Float figure
23406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23407 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23411 \begin_inset Float figure
23416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23417 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23420 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23422 name "fig:Undefinable"
23434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23435 \begin_inset Graphics
23436 filename clipart/3D-structure-distort.pdf
23448 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23452 \begin_inset Float figure
23457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23458 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23461 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23476 \begin_inset Graphics
23477 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
23489 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23496 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23499 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23501 name "fig:Two-images"
23518 \begin_layout Subsection
23520 \begin_inset Index idx
23523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23524 Floats ! Table floats
23532 \begin_layout Standard
23533 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
23535 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23536 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
23539 or the toolbar button
23542 arg "float-insert table"
23546 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
23547 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
23548 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
23550 \begin_inset space ~
23554 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23556 reference "tab:Table-float"
23563 \begin_layout Standard
23564 \begin_inset Float table
23569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23570 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23573 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23575 name "tab:Table-float"
23587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23589 \begin_inset Tabular
23590 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
23591 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
23592 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23593 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23594 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23596 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23614 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23632 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23652 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23670 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23688 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23708 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23721 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
23729 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23742 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
23745 \end{array}\right]$
23753 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23766 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
23787 \begin_layout Subsection
23789 \begin_inset Index idx
23792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23801 \begin_layout Standard
23803 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
23804 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
23805 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
23807 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
23815 \begin_inset space ~
23823 \begin_layout Section
23825 \begin_inset Index idx
23828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23837 \begin_layout Standard
23839 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
23841 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
23842 \begin_inset space \space{}
23849 \begin_layout Standard
23850 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
23851 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
23853 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23857 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
23858 and its alignment within the page.
23861 \begin_layout Standard
23863 \begin_inset Box Frameless
23873 height_special "totalheight"
23878 backgroundcolor "none"
23881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23884 This is a minipage.
23885 The text is set in an italic style.
23888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23891 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
23892 another formatting.
23900 \begin_layout Standard
23901 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
23904 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
23908 as described in section
23909 \begin_inset space ~
23913 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23915 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
23920 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
23926 \begin_layout Standard
23927 \begin_inset Box Frameless
23937 height_special "totalheight"
23942 backgroundcolor "none"
23945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23946 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
23947 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
23953 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23957 \begin_inset Box Frameless
23967 height_special "totalheight"
23972 backgroundcolor "none"
23975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23976 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
23977 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
23985 \begin_layout Standard
23986 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
23992 \begin_layout Standard
23993 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
23995 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
24002 \begin_inset space ~
24010 \begin_layout Chapter
24011 Mathematical Formulas
24012 \begin_inset Index idx
24015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24022 \begin_inset Index idx
24025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24054 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24056 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
24063 \begin_layout Standard
24064 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
24069 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
24072 \begin_layout Section
24074 \begin_inset Index idx
24077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24086 \begin_layout Standard
24087 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
24100 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
24102 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
24103 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
24104 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
24106 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24112 \begin_layout Standard
24113 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
24117 \begin_inset space ~
24122 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
24125 \begin_layout Standard
24126 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
24127 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
24130 \begin_layout Standard
24131 This is a line with an inline formula
24132 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
24138 \begin_layout Standard
24139 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
24140 paragraph, like this one:
24141 \begin_inset Formula
24148 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
24151 \begin_layout Standard
24153 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
24155 For example, typing
24156 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24166 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24169 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
24170 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
24174 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
24177 \begin_inset space ~
24185 \begin_layout Subsection
24186 Navigating in Formulas
24187 \begin_inset Index idx
24190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24199 \begin_layout Standard
24200 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
24201 achieved with the arrow keys.
24203 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
24204 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
24209 will leave a formula construct (a square root
24210 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
24214 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
24218 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
24221 \end{array}\right]$
24229 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
24234 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
24235 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
24238 \begin_layout Standard
24243 , printed in this document as
24244 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24248 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24252 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24255 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
24256 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
24257 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
24262 For example, if you want
24263 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
24271 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24281 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24285 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24290 , since in the latter case only the
24293 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
24298 will be under the square root sign:
24299 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
24305 \begin_layout Standard
24306 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
24308 \begin_inset Formula
24310 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
24319 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
24320 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
24323 \begin_layout Subsection
24327 \begin_layout Standard
24328 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
24329 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
24333 and a cursor movement key to select text.
24334 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
24335 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
24336 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
24337 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
24341 \begin_layout Subsection
24342 Exponents and Subscripts
24343 \begin_inset Index idx
24346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24353 \begin_inset Index idx
24356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24365 \begin_layout Standard
24366 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
24369 arg "math-superscript"
24375 arg "math-subscript"
24378 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
24380 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
24383 , type in a formula
24386 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24396 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
24402 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
24406 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
24412 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24418 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
24420 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24424 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24427 , you have to use an extra
24431 to separate the circumflex and the character.
24432 For example, if you want
24433 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
24439 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24445 Subscripts are similar: To get
24446 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
24452 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24460 \begin_layout Subsection
24462 \begin_inset Index idx
24465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24474 \begin_layout Standard
24475 Create a fraction either with the command
24481 or by using the icon
24484 arg "math-insert \\frac"
24490 \begin_inset space ~
24496 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
24497 The cursor is above the fraction line.
24498 To move it to the bottom, simply press
24503 To move back up, press
24508 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
24509 \begin_inset Formula
24511 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
24514 \end{array}\right)}\right]
24522 \begin_layout Subsection
24524 \begin_inset Index idx
24527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24536 \begin_layout Standard
24537 Roots can be created using the
24540 \begin_inset space ~
24548 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
24554 arg "math-insert \\root"
24576 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
24582 always produces a square root.
24585 \begin_layout Subsection
24586 Operators with Limits
24587 \begin_inset Index idx
24590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24597 \begin_inset Index idx
24600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24607 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24609 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
24616 \begin_layout Standard
24618 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
24622 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
24625 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
24626 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
24627 by entering them as you would enter a super-
24628 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
24629 The sum operator will automatically place its
24630 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24634 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24637 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
24639 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
24643 \begin_inset Formula
24645 \sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
24650 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
24654 \begin_layout Standard
24655 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
24657 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
24658 behind the operator and using the menu
24660 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24661 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
24663 \begin_inset space ~
24667 \begin_inset space ~
24681 \begin_layout Standard
24682 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
24683 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24687 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24691 \begin_inset Index idx
24694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24701 \begin_inset Formula
24703 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
24708 which will place the
24709 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
24713 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24717 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24721 In inline formulas it looks like this:
24722 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
24728 \begin_layout Standard
24729 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
24736 Have a look at section
24737 \begin_inset space ~
24741 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24743 reference "subsec:Functions"
24747 for an explanation of function macros.
24750 \begin_layout Subsection
24752 \begin_inset Index idx
24755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24764 \begin_layout Standard
24765 Most math symbols can be found in the
24768 \begin_inset space ~
24773 under one of several categories; including
24790 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
24794 \begin_layout Standard
24795 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
24796 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
24797 don't have to use the
24800 \begin_inset space ~
24805 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
24807 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
24810 \begin_layout Subsection
24812 \begin_inset Index idx
24815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24824 \begin_layout Standard
24825 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
24831 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
24837 \begin_inset space ~
24845 arg "math-insert \\space"
24849 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
24850 For example, the sequence
24855 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
24858 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
24860 \begin_inset Graphics
24861 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
24866 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
24867 the space marker and enter space again several times.
24868 With every space enter the size will be changed.
24869 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
24870 , because they are negative
24872 Here are two examples:
24875 \begin_layout Standard
24885 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
24891 \begin_layout Standard
24901 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
24907 \begin_layout Subsection
24909 \begin_inset Index idx
24912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24919 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24921 name "subsec:Functions"
24928 \begin_layout Standard
24932 \begin_inset space ~
24937 contains under the button
24940 arg "math-insert \\functions"
24943 a number of function macros, such as
24944 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
24948 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
24956 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
24963 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
24964 avoid confusions, because
24965 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
24969 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
24975 \begin_layout Standard
24976 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
24978 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
24982 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
24988 \begin_layout Standard
24989 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
24990 are placed, as described in section
24991 \begin_inset space ~
24995 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24997 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
25004 \begin_layout Subsection
25006 \begin_inset Index idx
25009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25018 \begin_layout Standard
25019 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
25021 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
25022 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
25023 commands, for example, to enter
25024 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
25027 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
25028 Our example is entered by typing
25033 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
25040 \begin_inset space ~
25044 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25046 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
25050 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
25053 \begin_layout Standard
25054 \begin_inset Float table
25059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25060 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25063 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25065 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
25069 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
25077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25079 \begin_inset Tabular
25080 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
25081 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
25082 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25083 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25084 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25095 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25124 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25142 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25155 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25168 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
25178 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25196 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25209 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25222 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
25232 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25250 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25263 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25276 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
25286 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25304 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25317 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25330 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
25340 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25358 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25371 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25384 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
25394 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25412 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25425 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25438 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
25448 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25466 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25479 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25492 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
25502 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25520 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25533 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25546 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
25556 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25574 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25587 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25600 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
25610 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25619 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25632 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25645 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
25666 \begin_layout Standard
25667 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
25670 \begin_inset space ~
25678 arg "math-insert \\hat"
25681 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
25685 \begin_layout Section
25686 Brackets and Delimiters
25687 \begin_inset Index idx
25690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25697 \begin_inset Index idx
25700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25707 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25709 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
25716 \begin_layout Standard
25717 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
25719 For some purposes, using just the keys
25724 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
25725 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
25726 toolbar delimiter icon
25729 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
25733 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
25734 \begin_inset Formula
25736 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
25744 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
25745 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
25749 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
25752 and the expression on the right was entered using the
25758 \begin_inset Formula
25760 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
25768 \begin_layout Standard
25769 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
25770 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
25774 \begin_layout Standard
25775 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
25776 left side and right side.
25777 If you use the option
25780 \begin_inset space ~
25785 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
25786 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
25788 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
25793 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
25794 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
25797 \begin_layout Standard
25798 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
25799 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
25800 is to go inside the brackets.
25801 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
25806 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
25807 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
25808 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
25812 arg "math-delim ( )"
25818 \begin_layout Section
25819 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
25820 \begin_inset Index idx
25823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25830 \begin_inset Index idx
25833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25840 \begin_inset Index idx
25843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25844 Math ! Multi-line Equations
25852 \begin_layout Standard
25853 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
25857 \begin_inset space ~
25865 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
25869 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
25870 Here is an example:
25871 \begin_inset Formula
25873 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
25882 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
25883 \begin_inset space ~
25887 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25889 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
25894 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
25895 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
25896 This alignment is set in the box
25901 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25909 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25913 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25921 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25925 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25933 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25939 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25947 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25950 for every column as default.
25951 For example, the sequence
25952 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25960 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25963 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
25964 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
25965 corresponds to the relevant column.
25966 The result will look like this:
25967 \begin_inset Formula
25970 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
25971 column & has & has\,right\\
25972 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
25981 \begin_layout Standard
25982 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
25985 arg "newline-insert newline"
25988 while the cursor is in the matrix.
25989 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
25991 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25994 or the math toolbar.
25997 \begin_layout Standard
25998 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
25999 It can be created with the menu
26001 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26002 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26004 \begin_inset space ~
26016 Here is an example:
26017 \begin_inset Formula
26031 \begin_layout Standard
26032 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
26035 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
26038 arg "newline-insert newline"
26042 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
26047 arg "newline-insert newline"
26050 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
26051 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26055 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26058 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
26059 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
26060 A new row is created by every further entry of
26063 arg "newline-insert newline"
26067 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
26068 Here is an example:
26069 \begin_inset Formula
26071 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
26072 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
26077 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
26078 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
26079 \begin_inset Formula
26081 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
26089 \begin_layout Standard
26090 The multi-line formula type described here is called
26097 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
26098 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
26099 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26101 reference "eq:asquared"
26106 The other types are described in section
26107 \begin_inset space ~
26111 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26113 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
26120 \begin_layout Section
26121 Formula Numbering and Referencing
26122 \begin_inset Index idx
26125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26126 Math ! Formula numbering
26132 \begin_inset Index idx
26135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26136 Math ! Referencing formulas
26142 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26144 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
26151 \begin_layout Standard
26152 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
26154 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26155 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26157 \begin_inset space ~
26161 \begin_inset space ~
26169 arg "math-number-toggle"
26173 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26174 within parentheses.
26175 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
26176 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
26177 the document class.
26178 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
26179 separated by a dot:
26180 \begin_inset Formula
26190 arg "math-number-toggle"
26193 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
26194 You can only number displayed formulas.
26197 \begin_layout Standard
26198 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
26200 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26201 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26203 \begin_inset space ~
26207 \begin_inset space ~
26215 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
26218 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
26219 \begin_inset Formula
26222 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
26228 To number all lines use the shortcut
26231 arg "math-number-toggle"
26237 \begin_layout Standard
26238 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
26241 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
26242 A label is inserted with the menu
26244 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26253 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
26254 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
26255 It is recommended that you use the suggested
26256 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26264 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26267 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
26268 label type when you have many labels in your document.
26269 We inserted in the following example the label
26270 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26274 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26277 in the second line:
26278 \begin_inset Formula
26280 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
26281 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
26286 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
26287 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
26288 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
26290 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26292 \begin_inset space ~
26300 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
26304 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
26305 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26306 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
26307 as the formula number:
26310 \begin_layout Standard
26311 This is a cross-reference to equation (
26312 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26314 reference "eq:tanhExp"
26321 \begin_layout Standard
26322 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
26323 's cross-reference box are described in section
26324 \begin_inset space ~
26328 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26330 reference "sec:Cross-References"
26335 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
26343 \begin_layout Section
26344 User defined math macros
26345 \begin_inset Index idx
26348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26357 \begin_layout Standard
26359 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
26360 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
26361 Math macros are explained in section
26364 \begin_inset space ~
26376 \begin_layout Section
26380 \begin_layout Subsection
26382 \begin_inset Index idx
26385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26394 \begin_layout Standard
26395 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
26396 To set a font in a formula, use the
26399 \begin_inset space ~
26407 arg "math-insert \\font"
26410 , or enter its command, listed in table
26411 \begin_inset space ~
26415 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26417 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
26424 \begin_layout Standard
26425 \begin_inset Float table
26430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26431 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26434 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26436 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
26440 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
26448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26450 \begin_inset Tabular
26451 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
26452 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
26453 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26454 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26456 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26465 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26476 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26486 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
26494 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26509 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26513 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
26521 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26536 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26540 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
26548 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26563 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26573 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
26581 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26596 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26600 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
26608 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26623 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26627 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
26635 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26650 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26661 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
26669 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26684 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26688 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
26696 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26722 \begin_layout Standard
26723 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26731 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
26747 \begin_layout Standard
26748 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
26749 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
26754 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
26755 space when you need a space in the box.
26756 Here is an example where
26757 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26761 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26768 denotes the set of numbers:
26769 \begin_inset Formula
26771 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
26779 \begin_layout Standard
26780 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
26781 You can, for example, put a character in
26790 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
26794 \begin_inset Newline newline
26797 So it is better not to use this feature.
26800 \begin_layout Standard
26801 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
26802 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
26806 \begin_inset Newline newline
26809 You can only print them emboldened using the command
26815 , which works like the other typeface commands:
26816 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
26822 \begin_layout Standard
26829 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
26832 \begin_layout Standard
26833 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
26835 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26836 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26838 \begin_inset space ~
26846 \begin_layout Subsection
26848 \begin_inset Index idx
26851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26860 \begin_layout Standard
26861 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
26863 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
26867 \begin_inset space ~
26871 \begin_inset space ~
26879 \begin_inset space ~
26887 arg "math-insert \\font"
26891 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26892 in black instead of blue.
26893 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
26894 Here is an example:
26895 \begin_inset Formula
26898 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
26899 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
26908 \begin_layout Subsection
26910 \begin_inset Index idx
26913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26922 \begin_layout Standard
26923 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
26924 automatically chosen in most situations.
26942 For most characters,
26950 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
26951 and certain other structures, are set larger in
26956 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
26957 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
26958 thinks are appropriate.
26959 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
26962 arg "math-insert \\style"
26966 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
26967 For example, you can set
26968 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
26971 , which is normally in
26980 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
26984 The four styles are used in the following example:
26987 \begin_layout Standard
26988 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
26992 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
26996 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
27000 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
27006 \begin_layout Standard
27007 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
27008 is set in a particular size with the menu
27010 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27012 \begin_inset space ~
27017 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
27018 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
27019 will be adjusted to correspond.
27020 As an example here is a formula in the font size
27021 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27025 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27031 \begin_layout Standard
27035 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
27041 \begin_layout Section
27042 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
27044 \begin_inset Index idx
27047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27054 \begin_inset Index idx
27057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27066 \begin_layout Standard
27068 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
27069 that are in common use.
27072 \begin_layout Subsection
27073 Enabling AMS-Support
27076 \begin_layout Standard
27077 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
27078 the document by selecting the checkbox
27081 \begin_inset space ~
27085 \begin_inset space ~
27089 \begin_inset space ~
27096 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27100 \begin_inset Index idx
27103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27104 Document ! Settings
27112 \begin_inset space ~
27118 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
27119 -errors in formulas,
27120 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
27123 \begin_layout Subsection
27125 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27127 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
27132 \begin_inset Index idx
27135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27136 Math ! Multi-line Equations
27144 \begin_layout Standard
27145 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
27146 provides a selection of different formula types.
27148 allows you to choose between
27169 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
27170 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27177 , for an explanation of these formula types.
27180 \begin_layout Chapter
27184 \begin_layout Section
27186 \begin_inset Index idx
27189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27196 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27198 name "sec:Cross-References"
27205 \begin_layout Standard
27206 One of \SpecialChar LyX
27207 's strengths is cross-references.
27208 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
27210 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
27211 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
27212 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
27215 \begin_layout Enumerate
27219 \begin_layout Enumerate
27220 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27222 name "enu:Second-item"
27229 \begin_layout Enumerate
27233 \begin_layout Standard
27234 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
27236 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27239 or by pressing the toolbar button
27246 A gray label box like this:
27247 \begin_inset Graphics
27248 filename clipart/label.png
27252 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
27254 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
27256 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27264 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27269 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27277 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27281 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27285 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27289 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
27290 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
27292 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27300 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27306 \begin_layout Standard
27307 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
27309 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27312 or the toolbar button
27315 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
27319 A gray cross-reference box like this:
27320 \begin_inset Graphics
27321 filename clipart/reference.png
27325 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
27327 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
27328 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27336 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27340 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
27344 \begin_layout Standard
27345 As an alternative to
27347 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27350 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
27355 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
27356 to the actual cursor position via the menu
27358 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27370 \begin_layout Standard
27371 Here is our cross-reference: Item
27372 \begin_inset space ~
27376 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27378 reference "enu:Second-item"
27385 \begin_layout Standard
27386 It is recommended to use a protected space
27390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27391 described in section
27392 \begin_inset space ~
27396 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27398 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
27407 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
27408 line breaks between them.
27411 \begin_layout Standard
27412 There are eight formats of cross-references:
27415 \begin_layout Description
27416 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
27417 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27419 reference "fig:Two-images"
27426 \begin_layout Description
27427 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
27428 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
27430 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27434 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27438 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27440 reference "eq:tanhExp"
27447 \begin_layout Description
27448 <page>: prints the page number: Page
27449 \begin_inset space ~
27453 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27454 LatexCommand pageref
27455 reference "fig:Two-images"
27462 \begin_layout Description
27464 \begin_inset space ~
27468 \begin_inset space ~
27471 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
27472 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27473 LatexCommand vpageref
27474 reference "fig:Two-images"
27479 \begin_inset Newline newline
27482 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
27483 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
27484 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
27485 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
27486 it prints “on the next page”.
27487 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
27490 \begin_layout Description
27492 \begin_inset space ~
27496 \begin_inset space ~
27500 \begin_inset space ~
27503 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
27504 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27506 reference "fig:Two-images"
27511 \begin_inset Newline newline
27514 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
27520 ; otherwise it behaves like
27524 \begin_inset space ~
27528 \begin_inset space ~
27537 \begin_layout Description
27539 \begin_inset space ~
27542 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
27543 \begin_inset Newline newline
27547 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
27550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27555 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27565 \begin_inset Index idx
27568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27570 packages ! prettyref
27576 \begin_inset Index idx
27579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27581 packages ! refstyle
27592 \begin_inset Newline newline
27595 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
27596 -package should be used for this feature by setting
27599 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
27603 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27604 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27612 is the default and preferred because
27616 supports only English documents.
27617 The format is specified by using the command
27629 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27630 preamble of the document.
27631 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
27633 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27641 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27649 \begin_inset Newline newline
27656 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
27661 \begin_inset Newline newline
27672 predefines reference formats for all available types.
27673 This is especially true for the wide variety of mathematical `theorem'
27675 So if you want to make formatted references to, say, Propositions, then
27676 you will need to define the relevant format yourself.
27681 , you might do so as follows:
27682 \begin_inset Newline newline
27689 newrefformat{prop}{Proposition
27694 \begin_inset Newline newline
27697 For more information about defining formatted references, have a look at
27698 the package documentation
27699 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27701 key "prettyref,refstyle"
27707 \begin_inset Newline newline
27718 will be available with formatted references only if you are using the
27725 \begin_layout Description
27727 \begin_inset space ~
27730 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
27731 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27732 LatexCommand nameref
27733 reference "fig:Two-images"
27740 \begin_layout Description
27742 \begin_inset space ~
27745 only: prints only the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27746 label for the reference:
27747 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27748 LatexCommand labelonly
27749 reference "fig:Two-images"
27754 \begin_inset Newline newline
27757 This allows for customization, using \SpecialChar TeX
27758 Code, if you want to issue a command
27759 that \SpecialChar LyX
27765 , then you may want to use the
27768 \begin_inset space ~
27773 option, which will output only the part of the reference following the
27775 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27779 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27783 This is the form needed for e.
27784 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27788 \begin_inset space \space{}
27795 's range commands.The number and current page of the referenced document
27796 part in the output is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
27798 The varieties are adjusted in the field
27802 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
27806 \begin_layout Standard
27807 You can only use the style
27811 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
27815 is always possible.
27818 \begin_layout Standard
27819 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
27820 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
27822 Referencing formulas is explained in section
27823 \begin_inset space ~
27827 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27829 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
27836 \begin_layout Standard
27837 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
27841 \begin_inset space ~
27845 \begin_inset space ~
27850 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
27851 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
27854 \begin_inset space ~
27859 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
27860 You can also go back with the toolbar button
27863 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
27869 \begin_layout Standard
27870 You can change labels at any time.
27871 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
27872 do not need to think about this.
27875 \begin_layout Standard
27876 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
27878 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
27882 \begin_layout Standard
27883 References are described in detail in the section
27884 \begin_inset space ~
27894 \begin_inset space ~
27902 \begin_layout Section
27903 Table of Contents and other Listings
27904 \begin_inset Index idx
27907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27914 \begin_inset Index idx
27917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27918 Navigating ! Outline
27924 \begin_inset Index idx
27927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27934 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27943 \begin_layout Subsection
27945 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27947 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
27954 \begin_layout Standard
27955 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
27957 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27958 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
27960 \begin_inset space ~
27964 \begin_inset space ~
27970 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
27972 If you click on it, the
27976 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
27977 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
27978 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
27980 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
27982 \begin_inset space ~
27987 that is described in section
27988 \begin_inset space ~
27992 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27994 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
28001 \begin_layout Standard
28002 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
28003 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
28005 \begin_inset space ~
28009 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28011 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
28015 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
28017 \begin_inset space ~
28021 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28023 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
28027 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
28029 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
28032 \begin_layout Subsection
28033 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
28034 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28036 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
28043 \begin_layout Standard
28044 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
28046 You can insert them via the
28048 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28052 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
28055 \begin_layout Section
28056 URLs and Hyperlinks
28057 \begin_inset Index idx
28060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28067 \begin_inset Index idx
28070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28079 \begin_layout Subsection
28081 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28090 \begin_layout Standard
28091 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
28093 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28099 \begin_layout Standard
28100 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
28102 \begin_inset Flex URL
28105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28107 https://www.lyx.org
28115 \begin_layout Standard
28116 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
28122 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
28126 \begin_layout Standard
28127 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28135 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
28144 \begin_layout Subsection
28146 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28148 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
28155 \begin_layout Standard
28156 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
28158 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28161 or with the toolbar button
28168 The appearing dialog has two fields:
28177 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
28178 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
28179 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28181 name "LyX's homepage"
28182 target "http://www.lyx.org"
28187 , an Email address like this:
28188 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28190 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
28191 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
28197 , or a link to a file.
28202 in the hyperlink settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
28210 \begin_layout Standard
28211 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
28213 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28221 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28224 to the link target.
28227 \begin_layout Standard
28228 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
28229 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
28230 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
28231 the text style dialog.
28232 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
28236 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28238 name "LyX's homepage"
28239 target "http://www.lyx.org"
28247 \begin_layout Standard
28248 The link text color can be changed, when the option
28252 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
28254 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28255 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28259 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
28261 \begin_inset Newline newline
28269 \begin_inset Newline newline
28276 in the PDF Properties dialog.
28279 \begin_layout Section
28281 \begin_inset Index idx
28284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28291 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28293 name "sec:Appendices"
28300 \begin_layout Standard
28301 Appendices are created with the menu
28303 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28305 \begin_inset space ~
28309 \begin_inset space ~
28315 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
28316 as the appendix part of the book.
28317 This part is marked with a red borderline.
28320 \begin_layout Standard
28321 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
28322 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
28323 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
28324 and the subsection number.
28325 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
28329 \begin_layout Standard
28331 \begin_inset space ~
28335 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28337 reference "chap:Credits"
28342 \begin_inset space ~
28346 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28348 reference "subsec:Export"
28355 \begin_layout Section
28357 \begin_inset Index idx
28360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28367 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28369 name "sec:Bibliography"
28376 \begin_layout Standard
28377 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
28379 You can include a bibliography database, which is explained in sec.
28380 \begin_inset space ~
28384 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28386 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
28393 , or you can insert the bibliography manually, using the paragraph environment
28398 , which is described in the following section (but see also sec.
28399 \begin_inset space ~
28403 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28405 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
28410 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
28411 this document, such as author-year citations, and if you have more than
28412 a handful of references, then you should seriously consider
28416 using a bibliography database.
28419 \begin_layout Standard
28420 In order to demonstrate the difference between these two approaches, we
28421 use two bibliographies in this document, a
28425 environment and a database-generated bibliography.
28426 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
28427 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
28428 In other words, the database approach relieves you, amongst other things,
28429 from the burden to check which entries you have actually cited.
28432 \begin_layout Subsection
28433 The Bibliography Environment
28434 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28436 name "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
28443 \begin_layout Standard
28448 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
28450 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
28459 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
28461 Each entry needs to be given a unique key, which is one word consisting
28462 of ASCII characters only.
28466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28468 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28471 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set"
28477 \begin_inset Newline newline
28481 \begin_inset Flex URL
28484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28486 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII
28498 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
28501 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28505 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28508 , a short form of its title, as the key.
28509 \begin_inset Newline newline
28516 for the entry, references to it will appear with this label instead of
28517 the number of the entry.
28522 in the bibliography items settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
28531 \begin_layout Standard
28532 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
28534 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28537 or the toolbar button
28540 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
28544 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
28545 containing the available citations.
28546 Select one or more keys from the list and
28556 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
28557 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
28561 \begin_layout Standard
28562 Citation references appear in the output as the number or the label of the
28563 bibliography entry with surrounding brackets.
28564 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
28566 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28570 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28576 \begin_layout Standard
28580 Companion Second Edition
28583 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28585 key "latexcompanion"
28593 \begin_layout Standard
28594 The \SpecialChar LyX
28595 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
28596 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28606 \begin_layout Standard
28607 You can also produce author-year or author-number citations, using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28614 \begin_inset Index idx
28617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28625 In order to do so, the label needs to be given the form
28626 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28630 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28634 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28637 Author A and Author B(Year)
28638 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28645 a blank between the author(s) and the opening parenthesis that delimits
28647 Then, if you select
28650 \begin_inset space ~
28655 in the document settings
28656 \begin_inset Index idx
28659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28660 Document ! Settings
28667 Bibliography\SpecialChar menuseparator
28669 \begin_inset space ~
28675 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28677 reference "subsec:Citation-Format"
28684 ), you can select between different author-year or author-number styles.
28687 \begin_layout Standard
28688 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
28691 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28693 \begin_inset space ~
28701 arg "layout-paragraph"
28705 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
28708 \begin_layout Subsection
28709 Bibliography databases
28710 \begin_inset Index idx
28713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28714 Bibliography ! Databases
28720 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28722 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
28729 \begin_layout Standard
28730 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same references in different
28735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28736 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
28738 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
28739 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
28744 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
28746 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
28747 your working field in a database.
28748 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
28749 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
28750 list for that document.
28751 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
28755 \begin_layout Standard
28756 The database is a text file with the file extension
28757 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28765 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28768 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
28769 The format is explained in
28770 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28777 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28779 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28781 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
28787 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
28788 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
28789 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
28791 \begin_inset Flex URL
28794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28796 https://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
28804 \begin_layout Standard
28806 supports two different approaches to use bibliography databases in a document.
28807 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28808 is the classic technique that has been the only way to use such databases
28810 It is quite established and mature and there is a huge range of existing
28812 But it has its drawbacks, especially when it comes to more complex bibliographi
28813 c needs and support for specific languages and scripts.
28814 Those are addressed by
28819 \begin_inset Index idx
28822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28824 packages ! biblatex
28830 It reads the same database format than Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28831 (although it has been significantly
28832 extended beyond Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28842 can handle any classic Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28843 database, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28844 might conversely fail to correctly
28845 handle databases that use specific
28854 , but it uses a different framework to generate citations and references
28858 \begin_layout Standard
28859 To select if Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28864 should be used, set in the document settings (menu
28866 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28870 \begin_inset Index idx
28873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28874 Document ! Settings
28886 \begin_inset space ~
28891 to a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28899 \begin_layout Subsubsection
28900 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28902 \begin_inset Index idx
28905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28906 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28915 \begin_layout Standard
28916 To access a database via Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28919 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28924 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
28926 \begin_inset space ~
28932 A window will appear in which you can add one or more databases and select
28933 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28941 Add bibliography to TOC
28943 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
28948 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
28949 in the document or just the cited references.
28952 \begin_layout Standard
28953 The Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28954 style file is a text file with the file extension
28955 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28963 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28966 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
28967 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
28968 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
28969 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
28971 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
28976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28977 For information on how this is done, have a look at
28978 \begin_inset Newline newline
28982 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28984 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
28994 In this document we used the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28999 , which provides an alpha-numeric style in accordance with the German Standards
29003 \begin_layout Standard
29004 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
29007 \begin_layout Subsubsection
29009 \begin_inset Index idx
29012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29013 Bibliography ! Biblatex
29019 \begin_inset Index idx
29022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29024 packages ! biblatex
29032 \begin_layout Standard
29033 Accessing a database via
29037 is almost identical to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29040 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29045 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
29047 \begin_inset space ~
29053 In contrary to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29054 you cannot select a
29059 The other dialog options are the same as with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29063 \begin_layout Standard
29068 has two different style files: a bibliography style file (text file with
29070 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29078 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29081 ) controls how the bibliography entries will look like and a citation style
29082 file (text file with the file extension
29083 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29091 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29094 ) controls the look of the citation references in the text.
29095 Usually such style files come in pairs and it makes sense to use matching
29097 It is nevertheless possible to mix any citation style with any bibliography
29101 \begin_layout Standard
29106 styles are not set in the
29109 \begin_inset space ~
29114 dialog, but in the document settings.
29115 \begin_inset Index idx
29118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29119 Document ! Settings
29124 However, in the dialog in the
29128 field, which is only visible if you use
29132 , you can enter options that determine how the bibliography is printed (for
29133 example how its heading will appear).
29134 These options are deescribed in detail in the
29139 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29149 \begin_layout Standard
29150 Inserting a citation reference works as described in section
29151 \begin_inset space ~
29155 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29157 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
29167 \begin_layout Subsubsection
29168 Bibliography Processors
29171 \begin_layout Standard
29172 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
29173 uses a bibliography processor,
29174 that is an external program that reads the database, sorts the citations
29175 and processes the data in a way it can be included in the document.
29176 The classic program is called Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29178 It has the advantage that it is very mature and widespread, but the disadvantag
29179 e that it has severe limitations, due to its age.
29182 \begin_layout Standard
29183 Meanwhile, some alternatives have been developed that address some of these
29185 LyX natively supports some of them and lets you select a custom processor.
29186 You can do this on a general level in
29188 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29189 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29190 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
29193 or for individual documents in
29195 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29196 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29200 The following variants are available by default:
29203 \begin_layout Description
29204 biber a specific, modern processor
29205 \begin_inset Index idx
29208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29215 developed exclusively for
29219 (it does not work with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29225 provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory and many specific features
29230 makes use of; if you use the
29234 approach, it is strongly recommended to use
29241 \begin_layout Description
29242 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
29243 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
29244 with all bibliography packages, although it will probably fail with
29248 bibliographies due to the limited memory.
29251 \begin_layout Description
29252 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding
29253 (but no Unicode support), larger memory than
29257 , works with all bibliography packages, although more complex
29261 bibliographies will exceed its limits, and not all
29265 features are supported.
29268 \begin_layout Standard
29269 By default (with the
29275 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29276 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29289 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29290 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29291 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
29294 ), \SpecialChar LyX
29295 selects an appropriate (available) processor for the current bibliography
29308 for Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29309 -based bibliography styles).
29310 This should suit most needs.
29313 \begin_layout Standard
29314 In Japanese documents, a specific processor is used.
29315 By default this is pBib\SpecialChar TeX
29316 (in \SpecialChar LyX
29321 ), a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29322 variant specifically aimed at Japanese.
29323 You can adjust it in
29325 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29326 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29327 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
29333 \begin_layout Standard
29334 Selected bibliography processors can be controlled with options that you
29335 can add below the selection.
29336 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
29337 of Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29343 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29353 \begin_layout Subsubsection
29357 \begin_layout Standard
29359 supports some specific tasks such as sectioned bibliographies and multiple
29361 These are explained in detail in section
29363 Customizing Bibliographies
29367 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29372 Additional Features
29377 \begin_layout Subsection
29379 \begin_inset Index idx
29382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29383 Bibliography ! Citation format
29389 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29391 name "subsec:Citation-Format"
29398 \begin_layout Standard
29399 Many different citation formats are common, e.
29400 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29404 \begin_inset space \space{}
29407 numerical citation (as
29408 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29412 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29415 like in this document), alpha-numerical citations (as
29416 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29420 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29423 ) or author-year citations (as
29424 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29428 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29433 supports these formats via specific citation packages and their style
29437 \begin_layout Standard
29438 By default a simple numeric citation style is used.
29441 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29442 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29446 \begin_inset Index idx
29449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29450 Document ! Settings
29455 you have a range of other options, depending on your preferred bibliography
29461 environment your only choice besides manual formatting of the bibliography
29462 labels, is there to use
29465 \begin_inset space ~
29476 \begin_inset space ~
29481 which gives you author-year and author-numerical citations (see above
29482 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29484 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
29491 \begin_layout Standard
29492 With a bibliography database (see
29493 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29495 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
29502 ) one has in contrary to the
29506 environment full access to the formatting styles.
29507 These style formats are available:
29510 \begin_layout Description
29512 \begin_inset space ~
29515 (BibTeX) the default Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29516 -based approached without any additional packages
29517 (simple numeric citations).
29520 \begin_layout Description
29521 Biblatex loads the package
29526 \begin_inset Index idx
29529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29531 packages ! biblatex
29536 and lets you select a style in the dropdown boxes
29538 Biblatex citation style
29542 Biblatex bibliography style
29545 Options to the package
29549 can be entered in the
29556 \begin_layout Description
29558 \begin_inset space ~
29562 \begin_inset space ~
29565 mode) loads the package
29569 with the natbib compatibility mode.
29570 This is a specific variant for users who switch an existing document that
29582 behavior very closely.
29587 this option has some additional styles.
29592 styles are also supported by this variant.
29595 \begin_layout Description
29597 \begin_inset space ~
29600 (BibTeX) loads the package
29605 \begin_inset Index idx
29608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29615 which provides author-year styles particularly suited for law studies.
29618 \begin_layout Description
29620 \begin_inset space ~
29623 (BibTeX) loads the package
29628 \begin_inset Index idx
29631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29638 which provides citation styles particularly suited for the humanities.
29641 \begin_layout Standard
29650 style formats provide the choice between author-year and author-numerical
29652 You have to select one style in the dropdown box
29661 formats, this only affects the appearance in the \SpecialChar LyX
29663 Whether the output uses numerical, author-year or another format such as
29664 alpha-numerical depends only on the selected
29666 Biblatex citation style
29669 However, when switching between Author-year and Author-number, a suitable
29675 , on the other hand, the dialog selection will ultimately determine the
29679 \begin_layout Standard
29680 For any author-year and author-numerical selection, multiple style variants
29681 are available in the
29686 Some selections also provide further options like the option to uppercase
29687 a name prefix such as
29688 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29692 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29696 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29700 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29703 ) or to expand or reduce the number of displayed others (i.
29704 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29708 \begin_inset space \space{}
29712 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29716 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29723 \begin_layout Standard
29724 In the citation dialog you can also set text to appear after a citation
29726 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29730 \begin_inset space \space{}
29733 page numbers, which will then be formatted according to the style's needs
29735 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29739 \begin_inset space \space{}
29743 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29747 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29755 in the citation dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
29759 \begin_inset space ~
29767 \begin_inset space ~
29773 Here is a simple example where the text
29774 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29778 \begin_inset space ~
29782 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29785 appears after the reference:
29788 \begin_layout Quote
29790 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29793 key "latexcompanion"
29801 \begin_layout Standard
29802 All styles except for
29806 also provide the feature to add text that precedes the reference (such
29808 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29812 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29816 This text is then also included in the parentheses, if the style requires
29820 \begin_layout Standard
29821 Note that these pre- and postnotes apply to the whole citation.
29822 So if you refer to multiple references at once, the prenote will precede
29823 the first citation in the list, the postnote will follow the last.
29828 styles allow to add pre- and postnotes to any individual reference in a
29829 multi-citation (so-called
29830 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29833 qualified citation lists
29834 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29840 If you use such a style and if the current reference includes multiple
29845 dialog will display three columns in the field
29852 \begin_inset space ~
29860 \begin_inset space ~
29868 \begin_inset space ~
29874 If you double-click on an item's
29877 \begin_inset space ~
29885 \begin_inset space ~
29890 field, you can add such individual pre- and postnotes.
29893 General text before
29899 fields you can add pre- and postnotes that apply to the whole list.
29902 \begin_layout Section
29904 \begin_inset Index idx
29907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29914 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29923 \begin_layout Standard
29924 An index entry is created if you use the menu
29926 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29928 \begin_inset space ~
29933 or the toolbar button
29940 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
29941 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
29942 by \SpecialChar LyX
29943 as the index entry.
29946 \begin_layout Standard
29947 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
29949 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29950 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
29952 \begin_inset space ~
29958 A light blue box labeled
29959 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29967 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29970 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
29971 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
29975 \begin_layout Standard
29976 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
29977 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
29978 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
29979 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29981 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29983 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
29991 \begin_layout Subsection
29992 Grouping Index Entries
29993 \begin_inset Index idx
29996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30005 \begin_layout Standard
30006 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
30008 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
30009 lists under the entry
30010 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30014 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30018 First we create the entry
30019 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30023 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30027 \begin_inset space ~
30031 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30033 reference "subsec:Lists"
30038 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
30039 \begin_inset space ~
30043 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30045 reference "sec:Itemize"
30049 , we insert the command
30052 \begin_layout Standard
30058 \begin_layout Standard
30062 \begin_layout Standard
30068 \begin_layout Standard
30069 for the enumerated list in section
30070 \begin_inset space ~
30074 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30076 reference "sec:Enumerate"
30083 \begin_layout Standard
30084 The exclamation mark
30085 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30089 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30092 marks the grouping levels.
30093 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
30094 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
30095 If we don't have an index entry for
30096 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30100 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30103 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
30106 \begin_layout Subsection
30108 \begin_inset Index idx
30111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30112 Index ! Page ranges
30120 \begin_layout Standard
30121 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
30123 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
30124 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
30125 an index entry in section
30126 \begin_inset space ~
30130 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30132 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
30139 \begin_layout Standard
30142 Paragraph environments|(
30145 \begin_layout Standard
30146 and another entry at the end of section
30147 \begin_inset space ~
30151 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30153 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
30160 \begin_layout Standard
30163 Paragraph environments|)
30166 \begin_layout Standard
30168 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30176 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30180 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30188 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30191 respectively start and end the index range.
30192 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
30193 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
30194 the pages of the indexed document parts.
30195 An example is the index entry
30196 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30199 Document ! Settings
30200 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30206 \begin_layout Subsection
30208 \begin_inset Index idx
30211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30212 Index ! Cross referencing
30220 \begin_layout Standard
30221 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
30222 We referred for example in the index entry
30223 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30227 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30231 \begin_inset space ~
30235 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30237 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
30241 ) to the index entry
30242 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30246 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30249 in the same section using the entry
30252 \begin_layout Standard
30255 GIF|see{Image formats}
30258 \begin_layout Standard
30259 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
30261 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
30262 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
30265 \begin_layout Subsection
30267 \begin_inset Index idx
30270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30271 Index ! Entry order
30279 \begin_layout Standard
30280 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
30281 follow the rules for the index order.
30282 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
30287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30288 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
30290 \begin_inset space ~
30294 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30296 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
30305 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
30306 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
30307 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30311 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30315 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30319 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30323 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30327 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30331 \begin_inset Index idx
30334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30335 Dummy entries ! maïs
30341 \begin_inset Index idx
30344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30345 Dummy entries ! maître
30351 \begin_inset Index idx
30354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30355 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
30360 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
30361 maïs, maison, maître.
30362 To achieve this, we use the command
30365 \begin_layout Standard
30368 previous entry@current entry
30371 \begin_layout Standard
30372 In our case we want to have
30373 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30377 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30381 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30385 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30388 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
30391 \begin_layout Standard
30397 \begin_layout Standard
30398 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
30399 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
30401 See the next subsection for an example.
30404 \begin_layout Subsection
30406 \begin_inset Index idx
30409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30410 Index ! Entry layout
30418 \begin_layout Standard
30419 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
30420 \begin_inset Index idx
30423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30426 This is an italic dummy entry
30431 You can also format the page number using the character
30432 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30436 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30439 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30440 -command without a backslash.
30441 We can write for example
30444 \begin_layout Standard
30447 italic page number:|textit
30450 \begin_layout Standard
30451 to get the page number in italic.
30452 \begin_inset Index idx
30455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30456 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
30461 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
30462 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
30464 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30472 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30480 \begin_inset space ~
30486 Have a look at section
30487 \begin_inset space ~
30491 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30493 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
30497 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30501 \begin_layout Standard
30502 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30510 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
30514 to generate the index, see section
30515 \begin_inset space ~
30519 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30521 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
30530 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
30535 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
30536 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30539 key "latexcompanion"
30552 \begin_layout Standard
30553 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
30555 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
30556 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
30557 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
30558 If so, put the following in the preamble
30561 \begin_layout Standard
30573 \begin_layout Standard
30577 \begin_layout Standard
30583 \begin_layout Standard
30584 in the index entry.
30585 \begin_inset Index idx
30588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30589 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
30594 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
30595 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
30596 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
30599 \begin_layout Standard
30600 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
30601 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
30602 a bold font for all index entries.
30603 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
30615 documentation for details,
30616 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30618 key "makeindex,xindy"
30626 \begin_layout Subsection
30628 \begin_inset Index idx
30631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30638 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30640 name "subsec:Index-Program"
30647 \begin_layout Standard
30648 If the index generation program
30652 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
30653 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
30657 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
30658 distribution, is used.
30662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30667 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
30668 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
30669 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
30670 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
30671 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
30681 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
30683 dialog, see section
30684 \begin_inset space ~
30688 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30690 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
30695 The available options are listed and explained in
30696 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30698 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
30704 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
30708 \begin_layout Standard
30709 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
30710 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
30713 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30714 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30718 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
30719 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
30722 \begin_layout Subsection
30726 \begin_layout Standard
30727 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
30728 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
30729 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30733 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30736 next to the standard index.
30738 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
30739 that add this feature.
30746 \begin_inset Index idx
30749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30751 packages ! splitidx
30756 package to generate multiple indexes.
30757 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
30762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30763 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
30765 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30773 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30774 style, but it also includes
30775 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
30776 Please consult the package's manual for details.
30784 \begin_layout Standard
30785 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
30786 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
30788 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30789 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30792 and select the option
30794 Use multiple Indexes
30801 already contains the standard index
30802 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30806 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30810 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
30811 also appear as a heading) to the
30815 input field and press the
30820 The new index now also appears in the list.
30821 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
30822 label color to the new index.
30825 \begin_layout Standard
30826 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
30829 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30836 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
30837 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
30838 are additional features:
30841 \begin_layout Itemize
30842 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
30843 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
30846 \begin_layout Itemize
30847 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
30848 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
30853 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
30854 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
30855 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
30856 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
30859 \begin_layout Itemize
30864 allows to use \SpecialChar TeX
30865 code in the name of the index.
30868 \begin_layout Section
30869 Nomenclature/Glossary
30870 \begin_inset Index idx
30873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30880 \begin_inset Index idx
30883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30912 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30914 name "sec:Nomenclature"
30921 \begin_layout Standard
30922 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
30923 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
30924 called nomenclature or glossary.
30927 \begin_layout Standard
30928 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30935 \begin_inset Index idx
30938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30946 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
30948 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30955 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
30959 \begin_layout Standard
30960 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
30961 and then use the menu
30963 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30969 \begin_inset space ~
30974 or the toolbar button
30977 arg "nomencl-insert"
30982 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30990 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30993 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
30996 \begin_layout Standard
30997 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
30998 The first is the term or
31002 that you wish to define.
31007 of the term or symbol.
31010 \begin_layout Standard
31011 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31019 To use \SpecialChar TeX
31020 code for nomenclature entries the option
31024 in the nomenclature dialog has to be used.
31032 \begin_layout Subsection
31033 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
31034 \begin_inset Index idx
31037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31038 Nomenclature ! Layout
31046 \begin_layout Standard
31047 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
31051 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
31054 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31058 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31062 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31066 \begin_inset Newline newline
31074 \begin_inset Newline newline
31080 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31084 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31087 character starts/ends the formula.
31088 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
31089 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
31091 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31097 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31101 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
31111 \begin_layout Standard
31112 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31113 syntax is given in section
31114 \begin_inset space ~
31118 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31120 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
31127 \begin_layout Standard
31131 \begin_inset space ~
31136 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
31138 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
31139 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31143 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31147 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31150 in this document is:
31151 \begin_inset Newline newline
31156 dummy entry for the character
31161 \begin_inset Newline newline
31173 \begin_inset space ~
31183 font use the command
31212 \begin_layout Standard
31213 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
31214 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31218 \begin_inset space \space{}
31222 \begin_inset Newline newline
31238 \begin_inset Newline newline
31241 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
31242 This command will make the font of all symbols
31249 \begin_inset space ~
31257 \begin_layout Standard
31258 If the characters |
31259 \begin_inset space \space{}
31263 \begin_inset space \space{}
31267 \begin_inset space \space{}
31271 \begin_inset space \space{}
31275 \begin_inset space \space{}
31278 should appear in nomenclature entries containing \SpecialChar TeX
31279 code they need to be escaped
31280 by adding a quote character in front of them.
31281 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
31282 LatexCommand nomenclature
31283 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
31284 description "The quote sign in TeX code is output by writing ' \"\" '."
31292 \begin_layout Subsection
31293 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
31294 \begin_inset Index idx
31297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31298 Nomenclature ! Sort order
31306 \begin_layout Standard
31307 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31308 -code of the symbol
31310 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
31312 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
31315 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
31316 LatexCommand nomenclature
31318 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
31326 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31330 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
31331 LatexCommand nomenclature
31334 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
31340 They will be sorted by
31341 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31349 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31353 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31363 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31367 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31370 will be sorted before the
31374 since the character
31375 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31379 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31382 is considered in sorting.
31385 \begin_layout Standard
31386 To control the sort order, you can edit the
31389 \begin_inset space ~
31394 field of the nomenclature dialog.
31395 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
31397 For the example given, you can insert
31401 in this field for the
31402 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31409 will be located before
31410 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31416 \begin_layout Standard
31417 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
31422 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31432 \begin_layout Subsection
31433 Nomenclature Options
31434 \begin_inset Index idx
31437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31438 Nomenclature ! Options
31444 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31446 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
31453 \begin_layout Standard
31458 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
31459 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
31462 \begin_layout Description
31463 refeq Appends the phrase
31464 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31476 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31479 to every nomenclature entry, where
31485 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
31488 \begin_layout Description
31489 refpage Appends the phrase
31490 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31502 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31505 to every nomenclature entry, where
31511 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
31514 \begin_layout Description
31515 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
31518 \begin_layout Standard
31519 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
31520 class options list in the
31522 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31526 In this document the options
31533 \begin_layout Standard
31534 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
31540 \begin_layout Standard
31541 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
31542 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
31547 field in the nomenclature dialog:
31550 \begin_layout Description
31560 \begin_layout Description
31563 nomrefpage Like the
31570 \begin_layout Description
31573 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
31582 \begin_layout Description
31586 \begin_inset space ~
31592 \begin_inset space ~
31597 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
31600 \begin_layout Standard
31602 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31606 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31609 are automatically translated for most document languages.
31610 If not, add these lines in front of the nomenclature list as \SpecialChar TeX
31614 \begin_layout Standard
31623 \begin_inset Newline newline
31629 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
31632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31633 \begin_inset space ~
31645 unskip, see equation
31648 \begin_inset Newline newline
31655 pagedeclaration}[1]{
31656 \begin_inset Newline newline
31662 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
31665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31666 \begin_inset space ~
31683 \begin_layout Standard
31684 If the numbers should be hyperlinks, assure that you use
31687 \begin_inset space ~
31692 in the document settings under
31695 \begin_inset space ~
31703 \begin_layout Standard
31711 \begin_inset Newline newline
31715 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
31718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31719 \begin_inset space ~
31731 hyperlink{equation.#1}{equation
31733 nobreakspace{}(#1)}}
31734 \begin_inset Newline newline
31741 pagedeclaration}[1]{
31742 \begin_inset Newline newline
31746 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
31749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31750 \begin_inset space ~
31762 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
31767 \begin_layout Subsection
31768 Printing the Nomenclature
31769 \begin_inset Index idx
31772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31773 Nomenclature ! Printing
31781 \begin_layout Standard
31782 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
31784 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31785 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
31790 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31798 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31801 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
31802 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
31803 You can choose between these settings:
31806 \begin_layout Description
31807 Default a space of 1
31808 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31814 \begin_layout Description
31816 \begin_inset space ~
31820 \begin_inset space ~
31823 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
31826 \begin_layout Description
31827 Custom custom space
31830 \begin_layout Standard
31831 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
31832 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31836 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31840 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
31848 For example, in order to change the name to
31852 , add the following line to the preamble:
31855 \begin_layout Standard
31863 nomname}{List of Symbols}
31866 \begin_layout Subsection
31867 Nomenclature Program
31868 \begin_inset Index idx
31871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31872 Nomenclature ! Program
31878 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31880 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
31887 \begin_layout Standard
31893 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
31894 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
31896 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
31901 by adding options, see section
31902 \begin_inset space ~
31906 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31908 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
31913 The available options are listed and explained in
31914 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31916 key "nomencl,makeindex"
31924 \begin_layout Section
31926 \begin_inset Index idx
31929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31936 \begin_inset Index idx
31939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31940 Document ! Branches
31946 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31948 name "sec:Branches"
31955 \begin_layout Standard
31956 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
31957 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
31958 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
31959 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
31962 \begin_layout Standard
31963 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
31964 allows you to put text into branches.
31965 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
31966 To create a branch, either select the menu
31968 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31969 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
31972 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
31974 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31981 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
31982 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
31983 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
31984 and whether the name of the branch should
31985 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
31986 (see below for an example).
31987 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
31988 to the name of the other) and to add
31989 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31993 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31997 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32001 \begin_inset space ~
32004 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
32005 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
32008 \begin_layout Standard
32009 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
32010 These boxes are inserted via the menu
32012 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32015 where you can choose a branch.
32016 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
32020 \begin_layout Standard
32021 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
32022 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
32025 \begin_layout Standard
32026 \begin_inset Branch Question
32030 \begin_layout Standard
32035 Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
32043 \begin_layout Standard
32044 \begin_inset Branch Answer
32048 \begin_layout Standard
32053 Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
32061 \begin_layout Standard
32068 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32069 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32072 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
32073 Consider for example a file
32074 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32078 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32081 which has the above branches.
32083 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32087 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32090 is active, the PDF export file would be called
32091 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32095 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32099 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32103 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32107 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32111 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32114 branch were inactive,
32115 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32119 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32123 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32127 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32130 branch was active, likewise
32131 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32135 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32139 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32143 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32146 branch was active, and
32147 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32150 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
32151 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32154 if both branches were active.
32155 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
32156 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
32162 \begin_layout Standard
32163 There are also inverted branch insets, whose content is output just in case
32169 This make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
32170 To control whether a particular inset is inverted, right-click on the inset
32174 \begin_inset space ~
32182 \begin_layout Standard
32183 \begin_inset Branch Answer
32187 \begin_layout Standard
32193 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32197 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32200 branch is deactivated.
32206 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
32212 \begin_layout Standard
32213 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
32214 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
32215 definitions for each branch.
32216 For example you can define for the question branch
32220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32221 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32222 -syntax, see section
32223 \begin_inset space ~
32227 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32229 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
32241 \begin_layout Standard
32251 \begin_layout Standard
32261 \begin_layout Standard
32262 and for the answer branch
32265 \begin_layout Standard
32275 \begin_layout Standard
32285 \begin_layout Standard
32286 \begin_inset Branch Question
32290 \begin_layout Standard
32294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32322 \begin_layout Standard
32323 \begin_inset Branch Answer
32327 \begin_layout Standard
32331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32359 \begin_layout Standard
32360 Now it is possible to use the
32364 question{\SpecialChar ldots
32371 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
32374 commands to obtain conditional output.
32375 Here is an example formula where only the
32382 \begin_inset Formula
32384 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
32392 \begin_layout Standard
32393 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
32401 \begin_layout Standard
32402 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
32404 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32408 \begin_inset space \space{}
32411 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
32413 For this advanced usage, see the
32419 Flex insets and InsetLayout
32424 \begin_layout Section
32426 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32428 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
32433 \begin_inset Index idx
32436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32445 \begin_layout Standard
32448 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32449 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32452 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
32454 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32460 \begin_inset Index idx
32463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32465 packages ! hyperref
32470 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
32471 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
32472 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
32473 part of the document.
32477 \begin_layout Standard
32478 The header information in the dialog tab
32482 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
32483 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
32484 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
32485 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
32489 \begin_inset space ~
32493 \begin_inset space ~
32498 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
32499 tries to extract the header information from your document title
32500 and author entries.
32504 \begin_inset space ~
32508 \begin_inset space ~
32512 \begin_inset space ~
32517 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
32520 \begin_layout Standard
32521 You can specify in the dialog tab
32525 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
32530 \begin_inset space ~
32534 \begin_inset space ~
32538 \begin_inset space ~
32543 option allows long links to be split;
32546 \begin_inset space ~
32550 \begin_inset space ~
32554 \begin_inset space ~
32562 \begin_inset space ~
32567 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
32570 \begin_inset space ~
32575 colors the different links.
32576 The default colors are:
32579 \begin_layout Labeling
32580 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
32585 for hyperlinks and URLs
32588 \begin_layout Labeling
32589 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
32597 \begin_layout Labeling
32598 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
32606 \begin_layout Standard
32607 but you can change these in the field
32612 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
32615 \begin_layout Standard
32618 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
32621 \begin_layout Standard
32626 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
32627 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
32628 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
32631 \begin_layout Standard
32636 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
32637 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
32638 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
32648 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
32649 when opening the PDF.
32651 \begin_inset space ~
32654 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
32655 \begin_inset space ~
32658 1 will only display the sections.
32661 \begin_layout Standard
32662 PDF properties are also used in this document.
32663 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
32669 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
32670 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32680 \begin_layout Section
32682 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32684 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32686 name "sec:TeX-Code"
32693 \begin_layout Subsection
32696 \begin_inset Index idx
32699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32707 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32709 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
32716 \begin_layout Standard
32717 As \SpecialChar LyX
32718 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
32719 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
32720 commands and constructs,
32723 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
32724 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
32725 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
32726 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32727 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
32728 cannot support all packages and
32732 \begin_layout Standard
32733 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
32734 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
32735 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
32739 Code box is created by the menu
32741 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32743 \begin_inset space ~
32748 or by the toolbar button
32761 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
32769 \begin_layout Standard
32770 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
32772 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
32774 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word
32778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32779 The LyX way would be to use a framed box.
32784 and are therefore using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32791 , you can write the command part
32797 in a \SpecialChar TeX
32798 Code box before the word and the closing brace
32802 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
32803 Code box behind the word.
32804 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
32805 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
32809 \begin_layout Standard
32810 \begin_inset Graphics
32811 filename clipart/ERT.png
32819 \begin_layout Standard
32823 \begin_layout Standard
32824 This is a line with a
32828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32851 \begin_layout Standard
32852 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32860 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
32861 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
32862 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
32863 know that the command is finished.
32871 \begin_layout Subsection
32872 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32874 \begin_inset Argument 1
32877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32878 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
32885 \begin_inset Index idx
32888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32896 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32898 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
32905 \begin_layout Standard
32906 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
32907 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32908 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
32909 uses in the background.
32910 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
32911 is based on commands, you can
32912 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32916 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32920 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
32921 any time if you know the right commands.
32922 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
32923 is the end of the day.
32924 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
32925 all caption labels bold.
32926 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
32928 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
32932 \begin_layout Standard
32933 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
32935 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32937 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32940 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32950 \begin_layout Standard
32951 As result you find that the package
32956 \begin_inset Index idx
32959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32967 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
32969 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32972 \SpecialChar menuseparator
32976 \begin_inset space ~
32984 \begin_layout Standard
32989 usepackage[options]{package name}
32992 \begin_layout Standard
32993 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
32994 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
32995 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
32996 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
32999 \begin_layout Standard
33000 In your case the package name is
33005 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
33010 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
33011 So you add the command
33014 \begin_layout Standard
33019 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
33022 \begin_layout Standard
33023 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
33027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33028 For more commands provided by the
33032 package, have a look at its documentation,
33033 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33048 \begin_layout Standard
33049 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
33051 For example if you use a
33055 class, you don't need the package
33059 , you can instead write
33062 \begin_layout Standard
33067 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
33072 \begin_layout Standard
33073 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
33074 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
33075 documentation of the document class you want to use.
33082 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
33085 \begin_layout Standard
33086 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
33087 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
33089 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
33090 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
33091 Code box as described in the previous
33095 \begin_layout Standard
33096 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
33097 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33100 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33102 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
33110 \begin_layout Standard
33111 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
33117 \begin_layout Standard
33121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33131 \begin_inset Note Note
33134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33135 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
33143 \begin_layout Left Header
33144 \begin_inset Argument 1
33147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33167 \begin_inset Note Note
33170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33171 defines the header line as described below
33179 \begin_layout Center Header
33180 \begin_inset Argument 1
33183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33192 \begin_layout Right Header
33193 \begin_inset Argument 1
33196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33217 \begin_layout Left Footer
33218 \begin_inset Argument 1
33221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33242 \begin_layout Center Footer
33243 \begin_inset Argument 1
33246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33258 \begin_inset Newline newline
33262 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
33268 \begin_layout Right Footer
33269 \begin_inset Argument 1
33272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33294 \begin_layout Section
33295 Customized Page Headers and Footers
33296 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33298 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
33303 \begin_inset Index idx
33306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33307 Document ! Header/Footer line
33313 \begin_inset Index idx
33316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33325 \begin_layout Standard
33326 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
33330 \begin_inset space ~
33341 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33347 \begin_inset space ~
33353 As a second step add in the menu
33355 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33356 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33360 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33365 Custom Header/Footerlines
33368 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33372 This module offers the following 6
33373 \begin_inset space ~
33379 \begin_layout Description
33381 \begin_inset space ~
33385 \begin_inset space ~
33389 \begin_inset space ~
33393 \begin_inset space ~
33397 \begin_inset space ~
33403 \begin_layout Description
33405 \begin_inset space ~
33409 \begin_inset space ~
33413 \begin_inset space ~
33417 \begin_inset space ~
33421 \begin_inset space ~
33427 \begin_layout Standard
33428 for the different positions in the header/footer.
33429 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
33432 \begin_layout Standard
33433 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
33434 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
33436 \begin_inset space ~
33440 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33442 reference "fig:Page-layout"
33446 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
33449 \begin_layout Standard
33450 \begin_inset Float figure
33456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33459 \begin_inset Tabular
33460 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
33461 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
33462 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
33463 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
33464 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
33466 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33475 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
33478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33484 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33495 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33504 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33513 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33524 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
33527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33528 The normal text on the page goes here.
33529 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
33531 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
33532 the chapter, company logo but you can use almost anything, except of floats.
33537 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33546 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33557 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33566 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33575 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33586 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33595 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
33598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33604 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33622 \begin_inset Caption Standard
33624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33625 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33627 name "fig:Page-layout"
33631 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
33644 \begin_layout Standard
33645 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33653 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
33657 \begin_inset space ~
33662 is set to “Default”.
33663 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
33672 \begin_layout Subsection
33676 \begin_layout Standard
33677 To define your header line, add all three header environments.
33678 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages, the
33679 things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
33680 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
33682 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty, nothing appears
33684 Defining the footer line works similarly.
33687 \begin_layout Standard
33688 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
33689 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
33693 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33695 \begin_inset space ~
33703 \begin_layout Description
33706 thepage prints the current page number
33709 \begin_layout Description
33712 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
33715 \begin_layout Description
33718 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
33721 \begin_layout Description
33724 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
33725 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
33728 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33732 \begin_inset Quotes prd
33735 because it usually goes in a left header.
33738 \begin_layout Description
33741 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
33742 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
33744 It is normally used in the right header.
33747 \begin_layout Subsection
33748 Default header/footer
33751 \begin_layout Standard
33752 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
33753 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
33754 footer has the page number.
33755 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
33756 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
33757 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
33760 \begin_inset space ~
33768 \begin_layout Subsection
33772 \begin_layout Standard
33773 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
33774 Some pages are different.
33775 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own, and so does
33776 any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
33777 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
33778 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
33779 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
33782 \begin_layout Subsubsection
33783 Header and footer decoration line
33786 \begin_layout Standard
33787 By default, you get a 0.4
33788 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33791 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
33792 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
33804 in the following way:
33807 \begin_layout Standard
33814 headrulewidth}{thickness}
33817 \begin_layout Standard
33818 where thickness is a size in standard units like
33831 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
33832 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33838 \begin_layout Standard
33839 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
33841 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in section
33842 \begin_inset space ~
33846 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33856 \begin_layout Subsubsection
33857 Several header/footer lines
33860 \begin_layout Standard
33861 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
33862 this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
33863 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the height of
33865 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33880 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33881 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33883 \begin_inset space ~
33891 \begin_layout Standard
33898 headheight}{height}
33901 \begin_layout Standard
33906 is a size in standard units (e.
33907 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33911 \begin_inset space \space{}
33919 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height, define your
33920 header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
33921 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33922 logfile with the menu
33924 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33926 \begin_inset space ~
33934 \begin_inset space ~
33939 to see if you can find a warning about the package
33944 \begin_inset Index idx
33947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33949 packages ! fancyhdr
33955 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
33956 for your header/footer.
33959 \begin_layout Subsection
33963 \begin_layout Standard
33964 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
33965 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
33966 This example consists of the following definition:
33969 \begin_layout Description
33971 \begin_inset space ~
33980 , empty optional argument
33983 \begin_layout Description
33985 \begin_inset space ~
33988 Header empty, empty optional argument
33991 \begin_layout Description
33993 \begin_inset space ~
34002 in the optional argument
34005 \begin_layout Description
34007 \begin_inset space ~
34016 in the optional argument
34019 \begin_layout Description
34021 \begin_inset space ~
34034 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34038 \begin_inset Newline newline
34042 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
34046 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34049 in the optional argument
34052 \begin_layout Description
34054 \begin_inset space ~
34063 , empty optional argument
34066 \begin_layout Description
34069 headrulewidth set to 2
34070 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34076 \begin_layout Standard
34077 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
34078 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
34084 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34094 \begin_layout Standard
34095 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
34101 \begin_layout Standard
34105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34109 pagestyle{headings}
34115 \begin_inset Note Note
34118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34119 switches back to page style with the default headings
34127 \begin_layout Section
34128 Previewing Snippets of your Document
34129 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34131 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
34136 \begin_inset Index idx
34139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34146 \begin_inset Index idx
34149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34158 \begin_layout Standard
34160 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
34161 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
34162 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
34165 \begin_layout Subsection
34169 \begin_layout Standard
34170 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34176 \begin_inset Index idx
34179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34181 packages ! preview-latex
34186 (on some systems named simply
34191 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
34193 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34200 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
34202 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
34210 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
34211 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34212 -package are automatically
34213 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
34217 \begin_layout Subsection
34221 \begin_layout Standard
34222 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
34223 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
34225 activate the option
34228 \begin_inset space ~
34235 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34241 \begin_inset space ~
34245 \begin_inset space ~
34248 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
34255 \begin_inset space ~
34268 \begin_inset space ~
34273 is the multiplication factor for the size.
34276 \begin_layout Standard
34277 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
34282 \begin_inset space ~
34290 \begin_inset space ~
34298 \begin_layout Standard
34299 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
34300 and when you finish
34304 \begin_layout Standard
34305 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34313 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
34314 generated by activating the option
34317 \begin_inset space ~
34323 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
34331 \begin_layout Subsection
34332 Selected document parts
34335 \begin_layout Standard
34336 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
34337 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
34338 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
34339 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
34341 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
34343 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34347 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
34348 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
34349 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
34352 \begin_layout Standard
34353 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34360 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
34365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34372 is explained in section
34374 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
34379 \begin_inset space ~
34389 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
34390 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
34391 the final rotated boxes,
34392 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
34393 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
34395 Here is the result:
34398 \begin_layout Standard
34399 \begin_inset Preview
34401 \begin_layout Standard
34406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34410 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
34416 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
34426 height_special "totalheight"
34431 backgroundcolor "none"
34434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34459 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
34465 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
34472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34487 \begin_layout Standard
34488 Previewing works also for colors.
34489 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34508 is explained in section
34515 \begin_inset space ~
34528 \begin_layout Standard
34529 \begin_inset Preview
34531 \begin_layout Standard
34535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34554 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
34559 This is text within a colored, framed box.
34563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34578 \begin_layout Standard
34579 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
34585 \begin_layout Standard
34586 If \SpecialChar LyX
34587 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
34588 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
34589 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
34590 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34591 packages in your document preamble that are required by
34592 the \SpecialChar TeX
34594 If \SpecialChar LyX
34595 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
34596 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
34598 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
34599 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
34600 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
34603 \begin_layout Subsection
34608 \begin_layout Standard
34609 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34610 source of the whole document or parts of it.
34613 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
34615 \begin_inset space ~
34620 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34622 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
34624 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
34625 's main window, then only this selection
34626 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
34627 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
34628 the source view window.
34633 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
34634 ; but note that if you have
34635 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
34637 not just the one which is open at the time.
34640 \begin_layout Section
34641 Advanced Find and Replace
34642 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34644 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
34649 \begin_inset Index idx
34652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34659 \begin_inset Index idx
34662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34671 \begin_layout Subsection
34675 \begin_layout Standard
34676 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
34677 allows for searching of complex,
34678 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
34680 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
34681 The key-features are:
34684 \begin_layout Itemize
34685 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
34686 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
34687 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
34691 \begin_layout Itemize
34692 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
34693 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
34694 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
34695 a section heading will only be found within section headings
34698 \begin_layout Itemize
34699 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
34700 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
34701 outside of mathematics environments
34704 \begin_layout Itemize
34705 Search may be widened to a specific
34710 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34714 \begin_inset space ~
34717 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
34718 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
34725 \begin_layout Itemize
34726 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
34727 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
34728 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34732 \begin_inset space ~
34735 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
34738 \begin_layout Subsection
34742 \begin_layout Standard
34743 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
34745 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
34758 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
34761 ) or the toolbar button
34764 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
34770 Advanced Find and Replace
34775 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34779 \begin_layout Standard
34785 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
34789 \begin_inset space ~
34794 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
34797 arg "paragraph-break"
34801 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
34802 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
34806 arg "paragraph-break"
34809 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
34813 searches backwards.
34816 \begin_layout Standard
34820 \begin_inset space ~
34825 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
34834 \begin_inset space ~
34839 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
34842 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34843 Searching for mathematics
34846 \begin_layout Standard
34847 Mathematical formulas, such as
34848 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
34851 or something more complex like
34852 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
34855 , may be searched for by typing them in the
34860 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
34861 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
34862 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
34863 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
34869 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34873 \begin_layout Standard
34874 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
34875 This is done by switching to the
34879 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
34884 This way, entering in the
34891 \begin_layout Itemize
34892 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
34893 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
34896 \begin_layout Itemize
34897 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
34898 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
34901 \begin_layout Itemize
34902 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
34903 of it only within section headings.
34904 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
34905 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
34909 \begin_layout Itemize
34910 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
34911 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
34914 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34918 \begin_layout Standard
34919 The entries made in the
34923 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
34926 \begin_inset space ~
34932 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
34936 button or alternatively press
34939 arg "paragraph-break"
34946 while the cursor is in the
34949 \begin_inset space ~
34957 \begin_layout Standard
34958 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
34960 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
34964 \begin_layout Itemize
34965 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
34966 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
34967 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34971 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34974 with its typewriter version
34975 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34983 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34989 \begin_layout Itemize
34990 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
34992 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34996 \begin_inset Formula $R$
35000 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35004 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35008 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
35012 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35015 (you may want to enable the
35018 \begin_inset space ~
35026 \begin_inset space ~
35031 options and disable the
35039 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
35040 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35044 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35047 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
35048 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
35052 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
35055 , or occurrences of
35056 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
35060 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
35066 \begin_layout Subsection
35070 \begin_layout Standard
35071 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
35075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35076 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
35078 \begin_inset CommandInset href
35080 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
35090 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
35096 This is done with the context menu
35098 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35099 Insert Regular Expression
35101 while the cursor is in the
35106 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
35107 expression matching rules
35111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35112 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
35115 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35119 \begin_inset space ~
35122 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
35123 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
35129 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
35130 same text in the document.
35131 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
35132 Examples of using such a feature may be:
35135 \begin_layout Enumerate
35136 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
35141 editor the fraction
35142 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
35146 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
35149 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
35150 fractions with the given denominator.
35153 \begin_layout Enumerate
35154 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
35166 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
35171 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
35172 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
35173 Also, by inserting a
35174 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
35177 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
35178 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
35181 \begin_layout Standard
35182 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
35183 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
35184 \begin_inset Formula $()$
35187 , and referring back to them through
35188 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
35192 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
35196 For example, try searching with the regexp
35197 \begin_inset Newline newline
35200 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
35203 \begin_inset Newline newline
35206 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
35209 \begin_layout Standard
35210 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
35213 \begin_layout Standard
35214 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35222 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
35223 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
35224 sub-expressions is absolute.
35226 \begin_inset space ~
35230 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
35233 always refers to the first occurrence of
35234 \begin_inset Formula $()$
35237 in all entered regexps.
35245 \begin_layout Section
35247 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35249 name "sec:Spellchecking"
35254 \begin_inset Index idx
35257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35266 \begin_layout Standard
35268 has a built-in spell checker.
35271 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35278 key or the toolbar button
35281 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
35284 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
35285 beginning of the currently selected text.
35286 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
35287 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
35288 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
35289 scrolled so that it is visible.
35290 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
35291 n, if any could be found.
35292 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
35296 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
35297 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
35300 \begin_layout Standard
35301 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
35304 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35308 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
35309 a different one at the top of the dialog.
35311 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
35312 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
35315 \begin_inset space ~
35323 arg "dialog-show character"
35326 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
35328 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
35331 \begin_layout Standard
35332 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
35333 can be downloaded from here:
35334 \begin_inset Newline newline
35338 \begin_inset Flex URL
35341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35343 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
35349 \begin_inset Newline newline
35353 \begin_inset space ~
35356 files for each language.
35357 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
35358 \begin_inset space ~
35361 files into \SpecialChar LyX
35362 's installation subfolder
35370 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
35372 \begin_inset Newline newline
35375 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
35376 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
35377 but in most cases these are
35393 is the language code.
35396 \begin_layout Subsection
35400 \begin_layout Standard
35403 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35404 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35406 \begin_inset space ~
35409 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35412 you can set the following things:
35415 \begin_layout Description
35417 \begin_inset space ~
35420 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
35421 should use for spell checking.
35422 Depending on your platform,
35432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35433 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
35434 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
35449 \begin_inset space ~
35452 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
35455 \begin_layout Description
35457 \begin_inset space ~
35460 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
35461 will always use the given language
35462 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
35465 \begin_layout Description
35467 \begin_inset space ~
35470 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
35472 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35476 \begin_inset space \space{}
35480 This should normally not be needed.
35483 \begin_layout Description
35485 \begin_inset space ~
35489 \begin_inset space ~
35492 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
35494 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35498 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35504 \begin_layout Description
35506 \begin_inset space ~
35509 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
35510 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
35511 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
35512 appear in a context menu.
35513 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
35517 \begin_layout Description
35519 \begin_inset space ~
35523 \begin_inset space ~
35527 \begin_inset space ~
35530 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
35534 \begin_layout Section
35536 \begin_inset Index idx
35539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35546 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35548 name "sec:Thesaurus"
35555 \begin_layout Standard
35557 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
35558 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
35567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35568 \begin_inset CommandInset href
35570 target "https://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
35580 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
35582 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
35583 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
35584 which are available for many languages.
35587 \begin_layout Standard
35588 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
35589 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
35593 \begin_layout Subsection
35594 Setting up the thesaurus
35597 \begin_layout Standard
35606 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
35610 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
35615 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
35617 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35621 \begin_inset space ~
35629 For instance, the US English files are named:
35632 \begin_layout Itemize
35636 \begin_layout Itemize
35640 \begin_layout Standard
35649 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
35650 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
35653 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35654 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35655 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
35657 \begin_inset space ~
35662 ) to the path where they are installed.
35666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35667 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
35668 ies, typical locations are
35674 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
35678 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
35682 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
35685 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
35691 LibreOffice-<Version>
35698 On the Mac, the default location is
35700 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
35701 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
35702 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
35703 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
35704 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
35705 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
35713 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
35714 during the \SpecialChar LyX
35715 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
35719 \begin_layout Standard
35720 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
35721 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
35723 \begin_inset Newline newline
35727 \begin_inset Flex URL
35730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35732 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/thesaurus/
35740 \begin_layout Standard
35741 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
35742 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
35744 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35745 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35746 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
35748 \begin_inset space ~
35753 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
35755 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
35756 and point \SpecialChar LyX
35760 \begin_layout Standard
35761 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
35763 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
35766 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
35772 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
35775 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
35776 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
35778 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35784 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35785 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35786 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
35788 \begin_inset space ~
35793 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
35796 \begin_layout Subsection
35797 Using the thesaurus
35800 \begin_layout Standard
35801 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
35803 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35806 or the toolbar button
35809 arg "thesaurus-entry"
35812 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
35814 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
35816 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
35817 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
35818 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
35827 ), related terms (such as
35830 \begin_inset space ~
35839 ), compounds (such as
35842 \begin_inset space ~
35851 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
35860 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
35863 \begin_layout Standard
35864 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
35865 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
35869 \begin_layout Standard
35870 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
35871 the dictionary, such as the above
35875 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
35876 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35880 \begin_inset space \space{}
35883 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
35884 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
35885 For example, looking up the word form
35889 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
35894 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
35895 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35899 \begin_inset space \space{}
35910 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
35911 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
35912 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
35915 \begin_layout Section
35917 \begin_inset Index idx
35920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35927 \begin_inset Index idx
35930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35931 Document ! Change Tracking
35937 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35939 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
35946 \begin_layout Standard
35947 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
35948 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
35949 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
35950 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
35952 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35954 \begin_inset space ~
35957 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
35959 \begin_inset space ~
35967 \begin_layout Standard
35968 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
35982 The color depends on the author that made the change.
35983 You can change the color in
35985 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35986 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35988 \begin_inset space ~
35992 \begin_inset space ~
35997 \SpecialChar menuseparator
36003 \begin_inset Index idx
36006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36007 Color ! Change tracking
36012 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
36013 's status bar when the
36014 cursor is in changed text.
36015 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
36018 arg "changes-merge"
36024 \begin_layout Standard
36025 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
36027 \begin_inset Index idx
36030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36039 \begin_layout Standard
36040 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
36046 \begin_layout Standard
36047 \begin_inset Graphics
36048 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
36056 \begin_layout Standard
36057 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
36063 \begin_layout Standard
36064 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
36067 \begin_layout Standard
36068 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
36074 \begin_layout Standard
36075 \begin_inset Tabular
36076 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
36077 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
36078 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
36079 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
36080 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36081 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36089 arg "changes-track"
36097 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36103 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36105 \begin_inset space ~
36108 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36110 \begin_inset space ~
36119 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36128 arg "changes-output"
36136 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36142 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36144 \begin_inset space ~
36147 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36149 \begin_inset space ~
36153 \begin_inset space ~
36157 \begin_inset space ~
36166 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36167 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36187 Jumps to the next change
36193 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36202 arg "change-accept"
36210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36216 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36218 \begin_inset space ~
36221 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36223 \begin_inset space ~
36232 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36233 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36241 arg "change-reject"
36249 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36255 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36257 \begin_inset space ~
36260 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36262 \begin_inset space ~
36271 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36272 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36280 arg "changes-merge"
36288 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36294 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36296 \begin_inset space ~
36299 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36301 \begin_inset space ~
36310 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36311 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36319 arg "all-changes-accept"
36327 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36333 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36335 \begin_inset space ~
36338 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36340 \begin_inset space ~
36344 \begin_inset space ~
36353 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36362 arg "all-changes-reject"
36370 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36376 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36378 \begin_inset space ~
36381 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36383 \begin_inset space ~
36387 \begin_inset space ~
36396 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36397 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36413 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36419 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36420 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
36422 \begin_inset space ~
36431 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36432 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36448 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36454 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
36456 \begin_inset space ~
36472 \begin_layout Standard
36473 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
36479 \begin_layout Standard
36480 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
36500 \begin_layout Standard
36501 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
36502 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
36503 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
36504 the next change after the current cursor position.
36505 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
36506 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
36507 step to the next change.
36508 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
36511 \begin_layout Standard
36512 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
36513 to describe a change.
36516 \begin_layout Standard
36517 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36523 \begin_inset Index idx
36526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36534 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
36536 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36543 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
36547 \begin_layout Section
36548 Comparison of Documents
36549 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36551 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
36556 \begin_inset Index idx
36559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36560 Comparison of documents
36568 \begin_layout Standard
36569 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
36572 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36576 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
36577 file with change tracking enabled showing the
36579 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
36581 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
36585 \begin_inset space ~
36589 \begin_inset space ~
36593 \begin_inset space ~
36602 \begin_inset space ~
36606 \begin_inset space ~
36610 \begin_inset space ~
36614 \begin_inset space ~
36618 \begin_inset space ~
36622 \begin_inset space ~
36627 enables the change tracking option
36630 \begin_inset space ~
36634 \begin_inset space ~
36638 \begin_inset space ~
36643 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
36646 \begin_layout Section
36647 International Support
36648 \begin_inset Index idx
36651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36652 International support
36660 \begin_layout Standard
36661 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
36662 with any language you want.
36663 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
36664 up \SpecialChar LyX
36666 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36668 key "Arabic,Armenian,Cyrillic,Farsi,Hebrew,Japanese"
36676 \begin_layout Standard
36677 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
36678 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
36679 \begin_inset space ~
36683 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36685 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
36692 \begin_layout Subsection
36694 \begin_inset Index idx
36697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36704 \begin_inset Index idx
36707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36708 Document ! Settings
36714 \begin_inset Index idx
36717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36718 Document ! Language
36726 \begin_layout Standard
36729 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36730 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36733 dialog lets you set
36735 the language, the quote style and character encoding
36740 \begin_layout Standard
36745 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
36750 \begin_inset space ~
36755 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
36756 For details about the different encoding options see section
36757 \begin_inset space ~
36761 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36763 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
36770 \begin_layout Subsection
36771 Keyboard mapping configuration
36772 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36774 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
36781 \begin_layout Standard
36782 If you have for example a U.
36783 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36786 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
36787 can use an alternate keymap.
36788 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
36793 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36794 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36795 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
36798 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
36799 \begin_inset space ~
36803 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36805 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
36810 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
36811 which one you want to use.
36814 \begin_layout Standard
36815 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
36816 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
36817 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
36818 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36821 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
36822 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
36823 one to support the characters you want.
36824 This and many other customizations are explained in the
36831 \begin_layout Chapter
36834 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36836 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
36843 \begin_layout Standard
36844 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
36845 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
36846 topic inside the user's guide.
36849 \begin_layout Section
36851 \begin_inset Index idx
36854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36863 \begin_layout Standard
36868 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
36871 \begin_layout Subsection
36875 \begin_layout Standard
36876 Creates a new document.
36879 \begin_layout Subsection
36883 \begin_layout Standard
36884 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
36885 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
36886 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
36889 \begin_layout Subsection
36893 \begin_layout Standard
36897 \begin_layout Subsection
36901 \begin_layout Standard
36902 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
36903 Click there on a file to open it.
36906 \begin_layout Subsection
36910 \begin_layout Standard
36911 Closes the current document.
36914 \begin_layout Subsection
36918 \begin_layout Standard
36919 Closes all opened documents.
36922 \begin_layout Subsection
36926 \begin_layout Standard
36927 Saves the actual document.
36930 \begin_layout Subsection
36934 \begin_layout Standard
36935 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
36938 \begin_layout Subsection
36942 \begin_layout Standard
36943 Saves all opened documents.
36946 \begin_layout Subsection
36950 \begin_layout Standard
36951 Reloads the actual document from disk.
36954 \begin_layout Subsection
36958 \begin_layout Standard
36959 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
36960 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
36961 It is described in the section
36963 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
36968 Additional Features
36973 \begin_layout Subsection
36977 \begin_layout Standard
36978 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
36979 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
36981 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
36982 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
36986 \begin_layout Standard
36987 When using the menu entry
36990 \begin_inset space ~
36995 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
36999 \begin_inset space ~
37003 \begin_inset space ~
37007 \begin_inset space ~
37012 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
37013 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
37016 \begin_layout Subsection
37018 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37020 name "subsec:Export"
37027 \begin_layout Standard
37028 You can export your document to various file formats.
37029 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
37031 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
37032 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
37033 during its configuration.
37036 \begin_layout Standard
37037 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
37039 \begin_inset space ~
37043 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37045 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
37052 \begin_layout Description
37058 \begin_inset space ~
37061 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
37063 \begin_inset space ~
37066 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
37067 \begin_inset Newline newline
37070 Since \SpecialChar LyX
37071 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
37075 \begin_layout Description
37076 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
37082 \begin_layout Description
37084 \begin_inset space ~
37087 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
37093 \begin_layout Description
37094 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
37095 's native DVI-format.
37096 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
37097 files paths or file names in your document.
37099 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
37106 \begin_layout Description
37107 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
37108 in files paths or file names
37111 \begin_layout Description
37113 \begin_inset space ~
37120 ) DVI-format using the program
37122 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
37125 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
37129 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
37132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37137 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
37145 \begin_layout Description
37147 \begin_inset space ~
37150 (cropped) the same as
37154 but with cropped page margins.
37157 \begin_layout Description
37159 \begin_inset space ~
37162 Dot text file with code in the programming language
37166 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
37171 \begin_layout Description
37175 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
37178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37183 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
37191 \begin_layout Description
37193 \begin_inset space ~
37197 \begin_inset space ~
37200 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
37204 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
37212 \begin_layout Description
37216 \begin_inset space ~
37225 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37226 source that is compilable with the program
37228 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
37232 \begin_layout Description
37236 \begin_inset space ~
37241 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37242 source, additionally all images used in the document
37243 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
37247 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
37250 \begin_layout Description
37254 \begin_inset space ~
37259 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37260 source code, additionally all images used in the document
37261 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
37269 \begin_layout Description
37273 \begin_inset space ~
37282 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37283 source that is compilable with the program
37289 \begin_layout Description
37291 \begin_inset space ~
37295 \begin_inset space ~
37302 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37303 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
37309 \begin_layout Description
37311 \begin_inset space ~
37314 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
37315 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
37317 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37321 \begin_inset space \space{}
37326 \begin_inset space ~
37330 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37334 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37338 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37342 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37345 represent the version number)
37348 \begin_layout Description
37350 \begin_inset space ~
37354 \begin_inset space ~
37357 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
37358 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
37359 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
37363 \begin_layout Description
37364 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
37365 's internal XHTML engine
37368 \begin_layout Description
37370 \begin_inset space ~
37374 \begin_inset space ~
37378 \begin_inset space ~
37382 \begin_inset space ~
37385 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
37390 For the conversion the program
37399 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
37402 \begin_layout Description
37403 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
37408 \begin_layout Description
37410 \begin_inset space ~
37413 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
37415 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
37418 For the conversion the program
37427 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
37430 \begin_layout Description
37432 \begin_inset space ~
37435 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
37436 For the conversion the program
37445 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
37448 \begin_layout Description
37450 \begin_inset space ~
37453 (cropped) the same as
37456 \begin_inset space ~
37461 but with cropped page margins
37464 \begin_layout Description
37468 \begin_inset space ~
37473 PDF-format using the program
37477 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
37480 \begin_layout Description
37484 \begin_inset space ~
37488 \begin_inset space ~
37496 \begin_inset space ~
37501 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
37502 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37506 \begin_inset space \space{}
37509 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
37513 \begin_layout Description
37517 \begin_inset space ~
37522 PDF-format using the program
37524 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
37527 , produces PDF-files directly
37530 \begin_layout Description
37534 \begin_inset space ~
37539 PDF-format using the program
37543 , produces PDF-files directly
37546 \begin_layout Description
37550 \begin_inset space ~
37555 PDF-format using the program
37559 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
37562 \begin_layout Description
37566 \begin_inset space ~
37571 PDF-format using the program
37576 , produces PDF-files directly
37579 \begin_layout Description
37583 \begin_inset space ~
37591 \begin_layout Description
37595 \begin_inset space ~
37599 \begin_inset space ~
37604 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
37605 and then exported as text using the program
37610 \begin_layout Description
37615 PostScript format using the program
37623 options see section
37624 \begin_inset space ~
37628 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37630 reference "subsec:General-output"
37637 \begin_layout Description
37638 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37639 source and also code in the statistical programming
37653 it is possible to use
37657 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
37661 \begin_layout Standard
37662 If one of the menu entries
37669 \begin_inset space ~
37678 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
37680 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
37682 \begin_inset space ~
37686 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37688 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37693 \begin_inset Index idx
37696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37697 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
37706 \begin_layout Subsection
37710 \begin_layout Standard
37711 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
37712 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
37715 \begin_inset space ~
37719 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37721 reference "sec:Paths"
37726 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
37735 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
37736 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
37737 's preferences as described in section
37738 \begin_inset space ~
37742 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37744 reference "subsec:Converters"
37751 \begin_layout Subsection
37752 New and Close Window
37755 \begin_layout Standard
37756 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
37760 \begin_layout Subsection
37764 \begin_layout Standard
37765 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
37768 \begin_layout Section
37770 \begin_inset Index idx
37773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37782 \begin_layout Subsection
37786 \begin_layout Standard
37787 Described in section
37788 \begin_inset space ~
37792 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37794 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
37801 \begin_layout Subsection
37802 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
37805 \begin_layout Standard
37806 Described in section
37807 \begin_inset space ~
37811 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37813 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
37820 \begin_layout Subsection
37824 \begin_layout Standard
37825 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
37826 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
37829 \begin_layout Subsection
37833 \begin_layout Standard
37834 Selects the whole document.
37837 \begin_layout Subsection
37838 Find & Replace (Quick)
37841 \begin_layout Standard
37842 Described in section
37843 \begin_inset space ~
37847 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37849 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
37856 \begin_layout Subsection
37857 Find & Replace (Advanced)
37860 \begin_layout Standard
37861 Described in section
37862 \begin_inset space ~
37866 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37868 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
37875 \begin_layout Subsection
37876 Move Paragraph Up/Down
37879 \begin_layout Standard
37880 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
37884 \begin_layout Subsection
37888 \begin_layout Standard
37889 Described in section
37890 \begin_inset space ~
37894 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37896 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
37903 \begin_layout Subsection
37905 \begin_inset Index idx
37908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37909 Paragraph ! Settings
37917 \begin_layout Standard
37918 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
37919 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
37923 \begin_layout Standard
37924 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
37925 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
37931 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37932 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37934 \begin_inset space ~
37942 \begin_layout Subsection
37943 Table and Rows & Columns
37946 \begin_layout Standard
37947 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
37948 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
37949 of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
37952 \begin_layout Subsection
37956 \begin_layout Standard
37957 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
37958 It will dissolve this inset.
37959 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
37963 \begin_layout Subsection
37967 \begin_layout Standard
37968 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
37969 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
37972 \begin_layout Subsection
37973 Increase/Decrease List Depth
37976 \begin_layout Standard
37977 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
37979 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
37980 \begin_inset space ~
37984 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37986 reference "sec:Nesting"
37991 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37993 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
38000 \begin_layout Subsection
38003 Start New Environment/Start New Parent Environment
38006 \begin_layout Standard
38007 These menus are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive environme
38008 nts of the same type.
38010 \begin_inset space ~
38014 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38016 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
38020 for an explanation.
38023 \begin_layout Section
38025 \begin_inset Index idx
38028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38037 \begin_layout Standard
38038 At the bottom of the
38042 menu the opened documents are listed.
38045 \begin_layout Subsection
38046 Open/Close all Insets
38049 \begin_layout Standard
38050 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
38053 \begin_layout Subsection
38054 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
38057 \begin_layout Standard
38058 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
38061 \begin_layout Standard
38062 Math macros are described in the
38069 \begin_layout Subsection
38073 \begin_layout Standard
38074 Shows the outline window as described in sections
38075 \begin_inset space ~
38079 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38081 reference "sec:Navigating"
38086 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38088 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
38095 \begin_layout Subsection
38099 \begin_layout Standard
38100 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
38102 \begin_inset space ~
38106 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38108 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
38115 \begin_layout Subsection
38119 \begin_layout Standard
38120 Opens a window showing console messages.
38121 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
38123 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38126 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
38127 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
38128 is processing the document.
38131 \begin_layout Subsection
38133 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38135 name "subsec:Toolbars"
38140 \begin_inset Index idx
38143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38152 \begin_layout Standard
38153 In this menu entry you can set the icon size and the appearance of the different
38155 All toolbars and the
38158 \begin_inset space ~
38163 can be turned on and off.
38168 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
38180 \begin_inset space ~
38192 \begin_inset space ~
38197 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
38201 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
38208 \begin_layout Standard
38213 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
38217 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
38218 or when a certain feature is enabled.
38219 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
38220 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
38221 is inside a formula or table respectively.
38224 \begin_layout Standard
38226 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
38227 \begin_inset space ~
38231 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38233 reference "sec:Toolbars"
38240 \begin_layout Subsection
38244 \begin_layout Standard
38248 \begin_inset space ~
38252 \begin_inset space ~
38256 \begin_inset space ~
38260 \begin_inset space ~
38264 \begin_inset space ~
38268 \begin_inset space ~
38273 will split \SpecialChar LyX
38274 's main window vertically while
38277 \begin_inset space ~
38281 \begin_inset space ~
38285 \begin_inset space ~
38289 \begin_inset space ~
38293 \begin_inset space ~
38297 \begin_inset space ~
38302 will split it horizontally.
38303 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
38304 to view the same document, but at different positions.
38305 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
38306 three or more documents at the same time.
38307 To close a split view, use the menu
38310 \begin_inset space ~
38314 \begin_inset space ~
38322 \begin_layout Subsection
38326 \begin_layout Standard
38327 Closes a split view.
38330 \begin_layout Subsection
38334 \begin_layout Standard
38335 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
38336 so that you will see nothing but your text.
38337 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
38338 's main window fullscreen.
38339 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
38340 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
38343 \begin_layout Section
38345 \begin_inset Index idx
38348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38357 \begin_layout Subsection
38361 \begin_layout Standard
38362 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
38363 \begin_inset space ~
38367 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38369 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
38380 \begin_layout Subsection
38382 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38384 name "subsec:Special-Character"
38391 \begin_layout Standard
38392 Here you can insert the following characters:
38395 \begin_layout Description
38400 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
38403 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
38404 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38405 -packages you have installed.
38406 You can get a complete display by checking
38409 \begin_inset space ~
38415 \begin_inset Newline newline
38419 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
38422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38427 Not all characters will be visible in the
38431 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
38432 dialog (see section
38433 \begin_inset space ~
38437 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38439 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
38443 ) can display every character.
38451 \begin_layout Description
38452 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
38456 \begin_layout Description
38458 \begin_inset space ~
38462 \begin_inset space ~
38465 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
38466 \begin_inset space ~
38470 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38472 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
38479 \begin_layout Description
38481 \begin_inset space ~
38484 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
38487 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38488 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38494 \begin_layout Description
38496 \begin_inset space ~
38499 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
38502 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38503 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38509 \begin_layout Description
38511 \begin_inset space ~
38514 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
38518 \begin_layout Description
38520 \begin_inset space ~
38523 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
38527 \begin_layout Description
38529 \begin_inset space ~
38532 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
38538 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
38544 \begin_layout Description
38546 \begin_inset space ~
38549 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
38553 \begin_layout Description
38555 \begin_inset space ~
38559 \begin_inset Index idx
38562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38569 \begin_inset Index idx
38572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38573 Language ! Phonetic symbols
38578 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
38579 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
38581 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38587 \begin_inset Index idx
38590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38598 \begin_inset Newline newline
38601 More information about this feature can be found in the
38607 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
38613 \begin_layout Description
38614 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
38616 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
38617 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
38621 \begin_layout Subsection
38625 \begin_layout Standard
38626 Opens a submenu with the following options:
38629 \begin_layout Description
38630 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
38631 \begin_inset script superscript
38633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38642 \begin_layout Description
38643 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
38644 \begin_inset script subscript
38646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38655 \begin_layout Description
38657 \begin_inset space ~
38660 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
38661 \begin_inset space ~
38665 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38667 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
38674 \begin_layout Description
38676 \begin_inset space ~
38679 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
38680 \begin_inset space ~
38684 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38686 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
38693 \begin_layout Description
38695 \begin_inset space ~
38698 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
38699 \begin_inset space ~
38703 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38705 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
38712 \begin_layout Description
38714 \begin_inset space ~
38717 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
38719 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38723 \begin_inset space \space{}
38726 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
38727 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
38733 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38736 To insert a fraction use the command
38741 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
38745 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
38751 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38754 The visible space is hereby the character before the
38761 \begin_layout Description
38763 \begin_inset space ~
38766 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
38767 \begin_inset space ~
38771 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38773 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
38780 \begin_layout Description
38782 \begin_inset space ~
38785 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
38786 \begin_inset space ~
38790 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38792 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
38799 \begin_layout Description
38801 \begin_inset space ~
38804 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
38805 \begin_inset space ~
38809 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38811 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
38818 \begin_layout Description
38819 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
38820 \begin_inset space ~
38824 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38826 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
38833 \begin_layout Description
38835 \begin_inset space ~
38838 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
38839 \begin_inset space ~
38843 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38845 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
38852 \begin_layout Description
38854 \begin_inset space ~
38857 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
38858 \begin_inset space ~
38862 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38864 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
38871 \begin_layout Description
38873 \begin_inset space ~
38877 \begin_inset space ~
38880 Break Inserts a line break point (zero-width space character) that is invisible
38883 \begin_inset space ~
38887 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38889 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
38896 for a usage example.
38899 \begin_layout Description
38901 \begin_inset space ~
38905 \begin_inset space ~
38908 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
38909 \begin_inset space ~
38913 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38915 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
38922 \begin_layout Description
38924 \begin_inset space ~
38927 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
38928 as described in section
38929 \begin_inset space ~
38933 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38935 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
38942 \begin_layout Description
38944 \begin_inset space ~
38947 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
38948 \begin_inset space ~
38952 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38954 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
38961 \begin_layout Description
38963 \begin_inset space ~
38966 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
38967 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
38969 \begin_inset space ~
38973 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38975 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
38982 \begin_layout Description
38984 \begin_inset space ~
38987 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
38988 \begin_inset space ~
38992 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38994 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
39001 \begin_layout Description
39003 \begin_inset space ~
39007 \begin_inset space ~
39010 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
39011 \begin_inset space ~
39015 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39017 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
39024 \begin_layout Subsection
39028 \begin_layout Standard
39029 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
39033 \begin_inset space ~
39054 are described in section
39055 \begin_inset space ~
39059 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39061 reference "sec:toc"
39070 is described in section
39071 \begin_inset space ~
39075 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39077 reference "sec:Index"
39085 is described in section
39086 \begin_inset space ~
39090 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39092 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
39098 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
39101 is described in section
39102 \begin_inset space ~
39106 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39108 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
39115 \begin_layout Subsection
39119 \begin_layout Standard
39120 To insert floats, as described in section
39121 \begin_inset space ~
39125 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39127 reference "sec:Floats"
39131 and in detail the chapter
39138 \begin_inset space ~
39146 \begin_layout Subsection
39150 \begin_layout Standard
39151 To insert notes, described in section
39152 \begin_inset space ~
39156 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39158 reference "sec:Notes"
39165 \begin_layout Subsection
39169 \begin_layout Standard
39170 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
39172 Branches are described in section
39173 \begin_inset space ~
39177 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39179 reference "sec:Branches"
39186 \begin_layout Subsection
39190 \begin_layout Standard
39191 Inserts document class-specific insets.
39192 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
39194 An example is the document class
39195 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39199 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39202 with three custom insets.
39205 Flex insets and InsetLayout
39209 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
39215 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
39218 \begin_layout Subsection
39220 \begin_inset Index idx
39223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39232 \begin_layout Standard
39233 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
39235 For more information see chapter
39237 External Document Parts
39240 \begin_inset space ~
39246 \begin_layout Subsection
39248 \begin_inset Index idx
39251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39260 \begin_layout Standard
39261 Inserts a box in a certain style.
39262 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
39269 \begin_inset space ~
39277 \begin_layout Subsection
39281 \begin_layout Standard
39286 dialog as described in section
39287 \begin_inset space ~
39291 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39293 reference "sec:Bibliography"
39300 \begin_layout Subsection
39304 \begin_layout Standard
39309 as described in section
39310 \begin_inset space ~
39314 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39316 reference "sec:Cross-References"
39323 \begin_layout Subsection
39327 \begin_layout Standard
39332 as described in section
39333 \begin_inset space ~
39337 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39339 reference "sec:Cross-References"
39346 \begin_layout Subsection
39348 \begin_inset Index idx
39351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39358 \begin_inset Index idx
39361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39362 Tables ! Multi-page ! Caption
39370 \begin_layout Standard
39371 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
39372 Floats are described in section
39373 \begin_inset space ~
39377 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39379 reference "sec:Floats"
39383 ; captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
39385 Multi-page Captions
39390 \begin_inset space ~
39398 \begin_layout Subsection
39402 \begin_layout Standard
39403 Inserts an index entry as described in section
39404 \begin_inset space ~
39408 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39410 reference "sec:Index"
39417 \begin_layout Subsection
39421 \begin_layout Standard
39422 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
39423 \begin_inset space ~
39427 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39429 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
39436 \begin_layout Subsection
39440 \begin_layout Standard
39441 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
39442 Tables are described in section
39443 \begin_inset space ~
39447 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39449 reference "sec:Tables"
39453 and in detail in the chapter
39460 \begin_inset space ~
39468 \begin_layout Subsection
39472 \begin_layout Standard
39478 Graphics are described in section
39479 \begin_inset space ~
39483 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39485 reference "sec:Graphics"
39492 \begin_layout Subsection
39496 \begin_layout Standard
39497 Inserts a URL as described in section
39498 \begin_inset space ~
39502 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39504 reference "subsec:URLs"
39511 \begin_layout Subsection
39515 \begin_layout Standard
39516 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
39517 \begin_inset space ~
39521 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39523 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
39530 \begin_layout Subsection
39534 \begin_layout Standard
39535 Inserts a footnote as described in section
39536 \begin_inset space ~
39540 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39542 reference "sec:Footnotes"
39549 \begin_layout Subsection
39553 \begin_layout Standard
39554 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
39555 \begin_inset space ~
39559 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39561 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
39568 \begin_layout Subsection
39572 \begin_layout Standard
39573 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
39574 title or caption of a float.
39575 Inserts a short title as described in section
39576 \begin_inset space ~
39580 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39582 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
39589 \begin_layout Subsection
39594 \begin_layout Standard
39595 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
39596 Code box as described in section
39597 \begin_inset space ~
39601 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39603 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
39610 \begin_layout Subsection
39612 \begin_inset Index idx
39615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39624 \begin_layout Standard
39625 Inserts a program listings box.
39626 Program listings are explained in the chapter
39628 Program Code Listings
39633 \begin_inset space ~
39641 \begin_layout Subsection
39645 \begin_layout Standard
39646 Inserts the actual date.
39647 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
39652 \begin_layout Subsection
39656 \begin_layout Standard
39657 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
39658 \begin_inset space ~
39662 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39664 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
39671 \begin_layout Section
39673 \begin_inset Index idx
39676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39685 \begin_layout Standard
39686 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
39687 \begin_inset space ~
39690 of the current document.
39691 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
39694 \begin_layout Subsection
39698 \begin_layout Standard
39699 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
39700 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
39701 to jump, for example, between section
39702 \begin_inset space ~
39706 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
39707 \begin_inset space ~
39710 2.5 and use the submenu
39713 \begin_inset space ~
39717 \begin_inset space ~
39724 \begin_inset space ~
39730 \begin_inset space ~
39734 \begin_inset space ~
39740 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
39744 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
39750 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
39753 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
39756 \begin_layout Standard
39757 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
39761 \begin_inset space ~
39766 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
39769 \begin_inset space ~
39774 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
39777 \begin_layout Subsection
39778 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
39781 \begin_layout Standard
39782 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
39786 \begin_layout Subsection
39790 \begin_layout Standard
39791 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
39792 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
39793 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
39797 \begin_inset space ~
39801 \begin_inset space ~
39809 \begin_layout Subsection
39813 \begin_layout Standard
39814 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
39817 The \SpecialChar LyX
39818 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
39820 \begin_inset space ~
39828 \begin_inset space ~
39833 manual for a detailed description.
39836 \begin_layout Section
39838 \begin_inset Index idx
39841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39850 \begin_layout Subsection
39854 \begin_layout Standard
39855 Change Tracking is described in section
39856 \begin_inset space ~
39860 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39862 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
39869 \begin_layout Subsection
39877 \begin_layout Standard
39878 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
39879 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
39880 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39882 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
39883 to the clipboard or update the view.
39884 \begin_inset Newline newline
39887 With the help of the logfile, experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
39891 \begin_layout Standard
39894 Open Containing Directory
39896 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
39897 's temporary folder for the document.
39898 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
39899 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems
39900 or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
39901 For example some journals require to send the
39905 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
39909 \begin_layout Subsection
39910 Start Appendix Here
39913 \begin_layout Standard
39914 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
39915 as described in section
39916 \begin_inset space ~
39920 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39922 reference "sec:Appendices"
39929 \begin_layout Subsection
39931 \begin_inset space ~
39937 \begin_layout Standard
39938 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
39939 default output format for the document (menu
39941 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39942 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39943 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
39945 \begin_inset space ~
39949 \begin_inset space ~
39955 \begin_inset space ~
39959 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39961 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
39965 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
39968 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39969 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
39971 \begin_inset space ~
39974 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
39976 \begin_inset space ~
39979 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
39981 \begin_inset space ~
39985 \begin_inset space ~
39991 \begin_inset space ~
39995 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39997 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40001 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
40002 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
40004 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40005 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40007 \begin_inset space ~
40010 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40012 \begin_inset space ~
40015 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40019 \begin_inset space ~
40023 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40025 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40030 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
40031 when it is first configured.
40032 The default output format is
40035 \begin_inset space ~
40043 \begin_layout Subsection
40044 View (Other Formats)
40047 \begin_layout Standard
40048 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
40049 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
40050 actual document with an external program.
40051 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
40052 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40053 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
40055 All possible formats are listed in section
40056 \begin_inset space ~
40060 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40062 reference "subsec:Export"
40067 You should at least see the menu entry
40072 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40074 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
40076 \begin_inset space ~
40080 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40082 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
40087 \begin_inset Index idx
40090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40091 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
40100 \begin_layout Standard
40101 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
40102 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
40104 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40105 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40107 \begin_inset space ~
40110 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40112 \begin_inset space ~
40115 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40119 \begin_inset space ~
40123 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40125 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40130 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
40131 when it is first configured.
40134 \begin_layout Subsection
40136 \begin_inset space ~
40142 \begin_layout Standard
40143 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
40144 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
40147 \begin_layout Subsection
40148 Update (Other Formats)
40151 \begin_layout Standard
40152 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
40153 your document without opening a new viewer window.
40156 \begin_layout Subsection
40157 View Master Document
40160 \begin_layout Standard
40161 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
40163 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40167 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40177 \begin_inset space ~
40182 manual for more information on this topic).
40183 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
40184 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
40188 \begin_inset space ~
40192 \begin_inset space ~
40197 generates the output of the whole book, while
40201 will just output the chapter alone.
40204 \begin_layout Standard
40205 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
40206 in the document settings (menu
40208 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40209 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40210 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40212 \begin_inset space ~
40216 \begin_inset space ~
40222 \begin_inset space ~
40226 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40228 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
40232 ) or in the preferences (menu
40234 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40235 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40237 \begin_inset space ~
40240 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40242 \begin_inset space ~
40245 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40247 \begin_inset space ~
40251 \begin_inset space ~
40257 \begin_inset space ~
40261 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40263 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40270 \begin_layout Subsection
40271 Update Master Document
40274 \begin_layout Standard
40275 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
40277 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40281 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40291 \begin_inset space ~
40296 manual for more information on this topic).
40297 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
40298 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
40301 \begin_layout Standard
40302 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
40303 in the document settings (menu
40305 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40306 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40307 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40309 \begin_inset space ~
40313 \begin_inset space ~
40319 \begin_inset space ~
40323 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40325 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
40329 ) or in the preferences (menu
40331 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40332 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40334 \begin_inset space ~
40337 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40339 \begin_inset space ~
40342 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40344 \begin_inset space ~
40348 \begin_inset space ~
40354 \begin_inset space ~
40358 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40360 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40367 \begin_layout Subsection
40369 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40371 name "subsec:Compressed"
40378 \begin_layout Standard
40379 Un/compresses the current document.
40380 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
40381 compression (see the
40383 Additional Features
40385 manual for details).
40388 \begin_layout Subsection
40392 \begin_layout Standard
40393 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
40396 \begin_layout Subsection
40400 \begin_layout Standard
40401 The document settings are described in appendix
40402 \begin_inset space ~
40406 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40408 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
40415 \begin_layout Section
40417 \begin_inset Index idx
40420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40429 \begin_layout Subsection
40433 \begin_layout Standard
40434 Spell checking is explained in section
40435 \begin_inset space ~
40439 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40441 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
40448 \begin_layout Subsection
40452 \begin_layout Standard
40453 The thesaurus is described in section
40454 \begin_inset space ~
40458 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40460 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
40467 \begin_layout Subsection
40469 \begin_inset Index idx
40472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40479 \begin_inset Index idx
40482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40491 \begin_layout Standard
40492 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
40493 the highlighted document part.
40496 \begin_layout Subsection
40502 \begin_inset Index idx
40505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40506 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
40515 \begin_layout Standard
40516 Generates with the help of the program
40518 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
40521 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
40522 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
40523 This feature is not available on Windows.
40526 \begin_layout Subsection
40532 \begin_inset Index idx
40535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40545 \begin_layout Standard
40546 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40551 \begin_inset space ~
40556 to see the full filename paths.
40559 \begin_layout Subsection
40561 \begin_inset Index idx
40564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40573 \begin_layout Standard
40574 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
40575 files as described in section
40576 \begin_inset space ~
40580 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40582 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
40589 \begin_layout Subsection
40591 \begin_inset Index idx
40594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40607 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
40612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40625 \begin_inset Index idx
40628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40629 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
40638 \begin_layout Standard
40639 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
40640 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
40641 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
40642 -packages and programs it needs; see
40644 \begin_inset space ~
40648 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40650 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
40657 \begin_layout Subsection
40661 \begin_layout Standard
40666 dialog as described in detail in appendix
40667 \begin_inset space ~
40671 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40673 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
40680 \begin_layout Section
40682 \begin_inset Index idx
40685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40694 \begin_layout Standard
40695 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
40696 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
40698 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
40702 \begin_layout Standard
40706 \begin_inset space ~
40711 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
40712 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40713 packages and classes found
40714 by \SpecialChar LyX
40716 \begin_inset space ~
40720 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40722 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
40729 \begin_layout Standard
40733 \begin_inset space ~
40738 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
40743 \begin_layout Section
40745 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40747 name "sec:Toolbars"
40754 \begin_layout Standard
40755 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
40756 \begin_inset space ~
40760 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40762 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
40769 \begin_layout Standard
40770 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
40771 This is described in the
40773 Additional Features
40778 \begin_layout Subsection
40780 \begin_inset Index idx
40783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40792 \begin_layout Standard
40793 \begin_inset Graphics
40794 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
40802 \begin_layout Standard
40803 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40809 \begin_layout Standard
40810 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
40815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40827 \begin_inset Note Note
40830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40831 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
40836 manual for more information.
40844 \begin_layout Standard
40845 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40851 \begin_layout Standard
40852 \begin_inset Tabular
40853 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
40854 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
40855 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
40856 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
40858 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40862 \begin_inset Graphics
40863 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
40873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40877 pull-down box for the environments
40890 \begin_layout Standard
40891 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
40897 \begin_layout Standard
40899 \begin_inset Tabular
40900 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
40901 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
40902 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
40903 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
40904 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40905 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40921 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40927 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
40934 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40935 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40951 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40957 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
40964 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40965 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40981 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40987 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
40994 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40995 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41003 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
41011 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41017 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41024 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41025 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41033 arg "spelling-continuously"
41041 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41045 Spellcheck continuously
41051 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41052 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41068 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41074 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41081 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41082 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41098 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41104 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41111 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41112 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41128 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41134 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41141 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41142 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41158 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41164 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41171 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41188 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41194 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41201 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41202 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41210 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
41218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41224 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41226 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41230 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41234 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41243 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41244 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41250 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
41258 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41264 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41266 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41270 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41274 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41283 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41284 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41292 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
41300 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41306 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
41307 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
41314 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41315 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41331 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41335 Emphasize text, function of the
41337 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41339 \begin_inset space ~
41342 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
41351 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41352 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41368 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41372 Set text to noun style, function of the
41374 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41376 \begin_inset space ~
41379 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
41388 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41389 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41397 arg "textstyle-apply"
41405 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41409 Format text using the current settings in the
41411 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41413 \begin_inset space ~
41416 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
41425 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41426 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41442 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41448 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41449 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
41451 \begin_inset space ~
41460 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41461 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41469 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
41477 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41483 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41490 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41491 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41497 arg "tabular-insert"
41505 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41511 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41518 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41519 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41527 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
41535 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41539 Toggle outline window on/off,
41541 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
41548 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41549 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41557 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
41565 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41569 Toggle math toolbar on/off
41575 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41576 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41584 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
41592 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41596 Toggle table toolbar on/off
41609 \begin_layout Subsection
41611 \begin_inset Index idx
41614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41623 \begin_layout Standard
41624 \begin_inset Graphics
41625 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
41633 \begin_layout Standard
41634 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
41640 \begin_layout Standard
41641 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
41645 \begin_layout Standard
41646 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
41652 \begin_layout Standard
41653 \begin_inset Tabular
41654 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
41655 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
41656 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
41657 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
41658 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41659 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41675 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41685 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41686 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41694 arg "layout Enumerate"
41702 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41712 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41721 arg "layout Itemize"
41729 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41739 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41740 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41756 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41766 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41767 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41775 arg "layout Description"
41783 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41793 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41794 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41802 arg "depth-increment"
41810 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41816 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41818 \begin_inset space ~
41822 \begin_inset space ~
41831 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41832 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41840 arg "depth-decrement"
41848 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41854 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41856 \begin_inset space ~
41860 \begin_inset space ~
41869 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41878 arg "float-insert figure"
41886 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41892 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41893 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
41900 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41901 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41909 arg "float-insert table"
41917 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41923 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41924 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
41931 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41932 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41948 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41954 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41961 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41962 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41970 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
41978 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41984 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41991 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41992 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42000 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
42008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42014 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42021 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42022 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42038 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42044 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42046 \begin_inset space ~
42055 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42056 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42064 arg "nomencl-insert"
42072 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42078 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42080 \begin_inset space ~
42089 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42090 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42098 arg "footnote-insert"
42106 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42112 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42119 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42128 arg "marginalnote-insert"
42136 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42142 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42144 \begin_inset space ~
42153 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42154 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42170 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42176 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42177 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
42179 \begin_inset space ~
42188 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42189 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42197 arg "box-insert Frameless"
42205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42211 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42218 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42219 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42241 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42248 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42249 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42265 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42271 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42273 \begin_inset space ~
42282 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42283 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42291 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
42299 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42305 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42306 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
42313 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42314 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42322 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
42330 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42336 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42337 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
42339 \begin_inset space ~
42348 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42349 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42357 arg "dialog-show character"
42365 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42371 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42373 \begin_inset space ~
42376 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
42383 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42384 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42392 arg "layout-paragraph"
42400 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42406 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42408 \begin_inset space ~
42417 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42418 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42426 arg "thesaurus-entry"
42434 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42440 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42454 \begin_layout Subsection
42455 View/Update Toolbar
42456 \begin_inset Index idx
42459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42460 Toolbar ! View / Update
42468 \begin_layout Standard
42469 \begin_inset Graphics
42470 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
42477 \begin_layout Standard
42478 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42484 \begin_layout Standard
42485 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
42489 \begin_layout Standard
42490 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42496 \begin_layout Standard
42497 \begin_inset Tabular
42498 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
42499 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
42500 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42501 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42502 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42503 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42519 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42525 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42532 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42533 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42541 arg "buffer-update"
42549 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42555 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42562 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42563 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42571 arg "master-buffer-view"
42579 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42585 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42587 \begin_inset space ~
42596 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42597 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42605 arg "master-buffer-update"
42613 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42619 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42621 \begin_inset space ~
42625 \begin_inset space ~
42634 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42635 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42643 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
42651 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42657 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42658 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42659 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
42660 Synchronize with Output
42666 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42667 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42683 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42689 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42690 View (Other Formats)
42696 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42697 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42703 arg "update-others"
42711 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42717 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42718 Update (Other Formats)
42731 \begin_layout Standard
42732 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
42736 \begin_layout Subsection
42740 \begin_layout Standard
42741 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
42742 \begin_inset space ~
42746 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42748 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
42752 , the table toolbar
42753 \begin_inset Index idx
42756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42765 \begin_inset space ~
42770 manual and the math macro toolbar
42771 \begin_inset Index idx
42774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42787 \begin_layout Chapter
42788 The Document Settings
42789 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42791 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
42796 \begin_inset Index idx
42799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42800 Document ! Settings
42808 \begin_layout Standard
42812 \begin_inset space ~
42817 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
42818 is called with the menu
42820 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42824 You can save your document settings as default with the
42826 Save as Document Defaults
42828 button in any dialog.
42829 This will create a template named
42833 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
42834 when you create a new document without
42838 \begin_layout Standard
42843 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
42844 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
42847 \begin_layout Standard
42848 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
42849 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
42850 to find the one you are looking for.
42851 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
42852 the submenus of the dialog.
42854 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42858 \begin_inset space \space{}
42862 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42866 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42869 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
42870 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
42871 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
42874 \begin_layout Section
42878 \begin_layout Standard
42879 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
42881 Document classes are described in section
42882 \begin_inset space ~
42886 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42888 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
42896 \begin_layout Standard
42900 \begin_inset space ~
42905 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
42910 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
42911 as a layout for a document class.
42912 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
42914 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
42923 \begin_layout Standard
42924 Some classes use special class options by default.
42925 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
42929 and you can decide to use them or not.
42930 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
42931 recommended you leave them untouched.
42936 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
42937 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
42942 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42944 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
42949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42950 When you want to use one of the following drivers
42951 \begin_inset Newline newline
42956 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
42959 \begin_inset Newline newline
42962 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
42963 distribution, see section
42968 \begin_inset CommandInset href
42970 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
42983 \begin_layout Standard
42988 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
42989 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
42990 in the background if the child document
42991 is opened without its master.
42992 This way child documents are always compilable.
42993 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
43000 \begin_inset space ~
43008 \begin_layout Standard
43009 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43020 \begin_inset Index idx
43023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43025 packages ! prettyref
43031 \begin_inset Index idx
43034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43036 packages ! refstyle
43041 for cross-references, see section
43042 \begin_inset space ~
43046 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43048 reference "sec:Cross-References"
43055 \begin_layout Section
43059 \begin_layout Standard
43060 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
43061 Please refer to the section
43064 \begin_inset space ~
43072 \begin_inset space ~
43077 manual for details.
43080 \begin_layout Section
43084 \begin_layout Standard
43085 Modules are explained in section
43086 \begin_inset space ~
43090 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43092 reference "subsec:Modules"
43099 \begin_layout Section
43103 \begin_layout Standard
43105 \begin_inset space ~
43109 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43111 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
43118 \begin_layout Section
43122 \begin_layout Standard
43123 The document font settings are described in section
43124 \begin_inset space ~
43128 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43130 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
43137 \begin_layout Section
43141 \begin_layout Standard
43142 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
43154 \begin_inset space ~
43159 and whether it should be a
43162 \begin_inset space ~
43167 can also be specified here.
43170 \begin_layout Standard
43171 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
43172 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
43173 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
43175 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
43178 \begin_layout Standard
43181 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
43184 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
43185 justifies the text on screen.
43186 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
43190 \begin_layout Section
43194 \begin_layout Standard
43195 This dialog is described in sections
43196 \begin_inset space ~
43200 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43202 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
43207 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43209 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
43216 \begin_layout Section
43220 \begin_layout Standard
43221 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
43222 \begin_inset space ~
43226 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43228 reference "subsec:Margins"
43235 \begin_layout Section
43237 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43239 name "sec:Language-encodings"
43244 \begin_inset Index idx
43247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43248 Language ! Encoding
43256 \begin_layout Standard
43257 The document language and quote styles are set here.
43258 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
43259 (the \SpecialChar LyX
43261 is always encoded in utf8).
43262 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
43263 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
43264 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
43265 -command is not known for
43266 a particular character).
43269 \begin_layout Standard
43270 If you use the option
43275 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
43276 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
43277 than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43279 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
43280 exactly one encoding.
43281 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
43284 \begin_layout Standard
43286 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
43287 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
43288 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
43289 installation supports Unicode), choose
43290 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
43291 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
43292 is quite incomplete, so
43293 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
43298 (when \SpecialChar LyX
43299 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
43300 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
43301 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
43302 -commands is not used, because all
43303 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
43304 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
43305 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
43306 , two new alternative engines
43307 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
43309 Both engines support Unicode natively.
43311 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
43314 \begin_inset space ~
43322 \begin_inset space ~
43330 \begin_inset space ~
43336 \begin_inset space ~
43340 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43342 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
43347 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
43351 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
43354 \begin_layout Standard
43358 \begin_inset space ~
43363 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43364 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
43366 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43370 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43374 The possible settings are:
43377 \begin_layout Description
43378 Default uses the language package that is selected in
43380 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43381 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43385 \begin_inset space ~
43389 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43391 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
43398 \begin_layout Description
43399 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
43400 format you will use.
43401 In many cases this will be
43406 \begin_inset Index idx
43409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43417 If the newer package
43422 \begin_inset Index idx
43425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43427 packages ! polyglossia
43432 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
43433 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
43434 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
43436 this package will be used instead of
43443 \begin_layout Description
43445 \begin_inset space ~
43456 would be more appropriate.
43459 \begin_layout Description
43460 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
43461 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
43465 (for German texts), type in
43468 \begin_inset Newline newline
43473 usepackage{ngerman}
43476 \begin_layout Description
43477 None will not use a language package.
43478 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
43481 \begin_layout Standard
43482 Here is a list with the important encodings:
43485 \begin_layout Description
43487 \begin_inset space ~
43491 \begin_inset space ~
43495 \begin_inset space ~
43502 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43508 \begin_inset Index idx
43511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43513 packages ! inputenc
43519 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
43520 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
43521 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
43525 \begin_layout Description
43526 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
43528 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
43529 commands, which may result in a big
43530 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
43531 -commands are needed.
43534 \begin_layout Description
43536 \begin_inset space ~
43540 \begin_inset space ~
43543 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
43546 \begin_layout Description
43548 \begin_inset space ~
43552 \begin_inset space ~
43555 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
43558 \begin_layout Description
43560 \begin_inset space ~
43563 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
43566 \begin_layout Description
43568 \begin_inset space ~
43572 \begin_inset space ~
43575 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
43576 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
43579 \begin_layout Description
43581 \begin_inset space ~
43585 \begin_inset space ~
43588 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
43592 \begin_layout Description
43594 \begin_inset space ~
43598 \begin_inset space ~
43601 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
43602 ISO-8859-13 encoding
43605 \begin_layout Description
43607 \begin_inset space ~
43611 \begin_inset space ~
43615 \begin_inset space ~
43618 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
43619 \begin_inset space ~
43625 \begin_layout Description
43627 \begin_inset space ~
43631 \begin_inset space ~
43635 \begin_inset space ~
43638 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
43639 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
43642 \begin_layout Description
43644 \begin_inset space ~
43648 \begin_inset space ~
43651 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
43652 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
43653 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43654 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
43655 \begin_inset space ~
43659 \begin_inset space ~
43665 \begin_layout Description
43667 \begin_inset space ~
43671 \begin_inset space ~
43674 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
43675 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
43676 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43678 should try to use the encoding Unicode
43679 \begin_inset space ~
43683 \begin_inset space ~
43689 \begin_layout Description
43691 \begin_inset space ~
43695 \begin_inset space ~
43698 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
43701 \begin_layout Description
43703 \begin_inset space ~
43707 \begin_inset space ~
43710 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
43713 \begin_layout Description
43715 \begin_inset space ~
43719 \begin_inset space ~
43722 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
43725 \begin_layout Description
43727 \begin_inset space ~
43730 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
43733 \begin_layout Description
43735 \begin_inset space ~
43738 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
43741 \begin_layout Description
43743 \begin_inset space ~
43747 \begin_inset space ~
43750 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
43753 \begin_layout Description
43755 \begin_inset space ~
43759 \begin_inset space ~
43765 \begin_layout Description
43767 \begin_inset space ~
43771 \begin_inset space ~
43774 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
43777 \begin_layout Description
43779 \begin_inset space ~
43783 \begin_inset space ~
43789 \begin_layout Description
43791 \begin_inset space ~
43795 \begin_inset space ~
43798 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43804 \begin_inset Index idx
43807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43814 , when using this, set the document language to
43819 \begin_layout Description
43821 \begin_inset space ~
43825 \begin_inset space ~
43828 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43833 , when using this, set the document language to
43836 \begin_inset space ~
43842 \begin_layout Description
43844 \begin_inset space ~
43848 \begin_inset space ~
43851 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43857 \begin_inset Index idx
43860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43862 packages ! japanese
43867 , when using this, set the document language to
43872 \begin_layout Description
43874 \begin_inset space ~
43878 \begin_inset space ~
43881 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43886 , when using this, set the document language to
43891 \begin_layout Description
43893 \begin_inset space ~
43897 \begin_inset space ~
43900 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43905 , when using this, set the document language to
43910 \begin_layout Description
43912 \begin_inset space ~
43915 (EUC-KR) for Korean
43918 \begin_layout Description
43920 \begin_inset space ~
43924 \begin_inset space ~
43928 \begin_inset space ~
43931 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
43934 \begin_layout Description
43936 \begin_inset space ~
43940 \begin_inset space ~
43944 \begin_inset space ~
43947 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
43948 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
43949 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
43952 \begin_layout Description
43954 \begin_inset space ~
43958 \begin_inset space ~
43964 \begin_layout Description
43966 \begin_inset space ~
43970 \begin_inset space ~
43973 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
43974 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
43977 \begin_layout Description
43979 \begin_inset space ~
43983 \begin_inset space ~
43986 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43992 \begin_inset Index idx
43995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44002 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
44005 \begin_layout Description
44007 \begin_inset space ~
44015 \begin_inset space ~
44018 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
44025 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
44028 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44035 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
44036 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
44038 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
44041 \begin_layout Description
44043 \begin_inset space ~
44047 \begin_inset space ~
44050 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44056 \begin_inset Index idx
44059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44066 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
44069 \begin_layout Description
44071 \begin_inset space ~
44074 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44080 \begin_inset Index idx
44083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44085 packages ! inputenc
44091 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
44095 \begin_layout Description
44097 \begin_inset space ~
44101 \begin_inset space ~
44105 \begin_inset space ~
44108 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
44109 \begin_inset space ~
44115 \begin_layout Description
44117 \begin_inset space ~
44121 \begin_inset space ~
44125 \begin_inset space ~
44128 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
44129 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
44130 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
44134 \begin_layout Description
44136 \begin_inset space ~
44140 \begin_inset space ~
44144 \begin_inset space ~
44147 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
44148 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
44151 \begin_layout Section
44153 \begin_inset Index idx
44156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44163 \begin_inset Index idx
44166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44173 \begin_inset Index idx
44176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44177 Color ! Shaded boxes
44183 \begin_inset Index idx
44186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44187 Color ! Greyed-out notes
44195 \begin_layout Standard
44196 Here you can alter the font color for the
44200 (default: black), for
44203 \begin_inset space ~
44208 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
44212 (default: white) and for
44215 \begin_inset space ~
44225 sets the color back to the default.
44228 \begin_layout Standard
44229 Clicking any button showing
44237 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
44238 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
44239 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
44240 later more quickly.
44243 \begin_layout Standard
44244 Note, if you change the
44247 \begin_inset space ~
44252 font color and use the option
44255 \begin_inset space ~
44260 in the document settings under
44263 \begin_inset space ~
44268 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
44269 \begin_inset space ~
44273 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44275 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
44282 \begin_layout Standard
44283 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
44289 \begin_layout Standard
44293 \begin_inset space ~
44302 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
44305 \begin_inset space ~
44308 Code after a forced page break:
44311 \begin_layout Itemize
44312 For the page color:
44313 \begin_inset Newline newline
44320 pagecolor{color name}
44323 \begin_layout Itemize
44324 For the text color:
44325 \begin_inset Newline newline
44335 \begin_layout Standard
44336 You are restricted to one of
44372 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
44379 \begin_inset space ~
44385 \begin_inset Newline newline
44388 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
44389 names to refer to them:
44392 \begin_layout Itemize
44398 \begin_inset Newline newline
44403 page_backgroundcolor
44406 \begin_layout Itemize
44410 \begin_inset space ~
44416 \begin_inset Newline newline
44424 \begin_layout Itemize
44428 \begin_inset space ~
44434 \begin_inset Newline newline
44442 \begin_layout Itemize
44446 \begin_inset space ~
44452 \begin_inset Newline newline
44460 \begin_layout Standard
44461 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
44464 \begin_inset space ~
44472 \begin_inset space ~
44480 \begin_layout Section
44484 \begin_layout Standard
44485 Here you can adjust the
44489 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
44493 as described in section
44494 \begin_inset space ~
44498 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44500 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
44507 \begin_layout Section
44511 \begin_layout Standard
44512 Here you can specify if a specific citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44518 \begin_inset Index idx
44521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44523 packages ! biblatex
44533 \begin_inset Index idx
44536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44548 \begin_inset Index idx
44551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44559 If you use Bib\SpecialChar TeX
44562 Sectioned bibliography
44564 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44570 \begin_inset Index idx
44573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44575 packages ! bibtopic
44585 , you can select the style files and specify further options.
44586 Finally, you can select a document-specific
44590 for the generation of the bibliography.
44591 For a further description of these possibilities see section
44592 \begin_inset space ~
44596 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44598 reference "sec:Bibliography"
44605 \begin_layout Section
44609 \begin_layout Standard
44610 Here you can define the
44614 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
44616 \begin_inset space ~
44620 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44622 reference "sec:Index"
44629 \begin_layout Section
44633 \begin_layout Standard
44634 The PDF properties are explained in section
44635 \begin_inset space ~
44639 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44641 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
44648 \begin_layout Section
44652 \begin_layout Standard
44653 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
44654 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44660 \begin_inset Index idx
44663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44675 \begin_inset Index idx
44678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44690 \begin_inset Index idx
44693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44705 \begin_inset Index idx
44708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44720 \begin_inset Index idx
44723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44725 packages ! mathdots
44735 \begin_inset Index idx
44738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44740 packages ! mathtools
44750 \begin_inset Index idx
44753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44765 \begin_inset Index idx
44768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44770 packages ! stackrel
44780 \begin_inset Index idx
44783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44785 packages ! stmaryrd
44795 \begin_inset Index idx
44798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44800 packages ! undertilde
44805 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
44808 \begin_layout Description
44809 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
44810 -errors in formulas,
44811 ensure that you have this enabled.
44814 \begin_layout Description
44815 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
44816 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
44817 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
44821 \begin_layout Description
44822 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
44825 \begin_inset space ~
44837 \begin_layout Description
44838 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
44841 \begin_inset space ~
44853 \begin_layout Description
44854 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
44865 \begin_layout Description
44866 mathtools is used for the math commands
44902 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
44909 \begin_layout Description
44910 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
44912 Chemical Symbols and Equations
44921 \begin_layout Description
44922 stackrel is used for the math command
44939 \begin_layout Description
44940 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
44943 \begin_layout Description
44944 undertilde is used for the math command
44952 Accents for one Character
44961 \begin_layout Section
44965 \begin_layout Standard
44966 The float placement options are described in the section
44969 \begin_inset space ~
44977 \begin_inset space ~
44985 \begin_layout Section
44989 \begin_layout Standard
44990 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
44992 Program Code Listings
44997 \begin_inset space ~
45005 \begin_layout Section
45009 \begin_layout Standard
45010 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
45018 set to be used and set the
45023 The itemize environment is described in section
45024 \begin_inset space ~
45028 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45030 reference "sec:Itemize"
45037 \begin_layout Standard
45038 You can furthermore specify a
45041 \begin_inset space ~
45046 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45047 command of the desired character.
45048 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
45055 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
45057 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45061 \begin_inset space \space{}
45065 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
45075 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
45076 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
45079 \begin_layout Standard
45080 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
45083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45088 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
45089 -packages in the preamble (menu
45092 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45093 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
45096 \begin_inset space ~
45102 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
45106 usepackage{textcomp}
45109 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
45113 usepackage{amssymb}
45123 \begin_layout Section
45127 \begin_layout Standard
45128 Branches are described in section
45129 \begin_inset space ~
45133 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45135 reference "sec:Branches"
45142 \begin_layout Section
45144 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45146 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
45153 \begin_layout Standard
45154 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
45157 \begin_layout Description
45159 \begin_inset space ~
45163 \begin_inset space ~
45166 Format: The format that is used when you enter
45167 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45171 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45175 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45179 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45183 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45186 View Master Document
45187 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45191 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45194 Update Master Document
45195 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45202 menu or the toolbar.
45203 The default is set in
45205 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45206 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
45208 \begin_inset space ~
45211 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
45215 \begin_inset space ~
45219 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45221 reference "sec:File-Formats"
45228 \begin_layout Description
45230 \begin_inset space ~
45234 \begin_inset space ~
45237 Output settings for the menu
45239 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
45241 \begin_inset space ~
45247 For a detailed description see section
45249 Reverse DVI/PDF search
45254 \begin_inset space ~
45262 \begin_layout Description
45264 \begin_inset space ~
45268 \begin_inset space ~
45271 Options offers settings for the export format
45279 \begin_inset space ~
45284 will assure that the output follows exactly version
45285 \begin_inset space ~
45288 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
45292 \begin_inset space ~
45297 settings are described in detail in section
45299 Math Output in XHTML
45304 \begin_inset space ~
45313 \begin_inset space ~
45317 \begin_inset space ~
45322 is used for the size of equations in the output.
45325 \begin_layout Description
45327 \begin_inset space ~
45332 Save transient properties
45334 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that
45335 are specific to the user are saved with the document.
45336 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
45340 \begin_layout Itemize
45341 the activation of change tracking
45344 \begin_layout Itemize
45345 the output of tracked changes
45348 \begin_layout Itemize
45349 the recording of the document directory path.
45352 \begin_layout Standard
45353 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when
45354 using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts).
45358 \begin_layout Section
45366 \begin_layout Standard
45367 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
45369 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
45371 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
45373 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
45377 \begin_layout Standard
45378 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45379 -syntax is given in section
45380 \begin_inset space ~
45384 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45386 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
45393 \begin_layout Chapter
45399 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45401 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
45406 \begin_inset Index idx
45409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45418 \begin_layout Standard
45419 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
45421 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45425 It has the following submenus.
45428 \begin_layout Section
45432 \begin_layout Subsection
45436 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45437 User Interface File
45438 \begin_inset Index idx
45441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45442 Customization ! of toolbars
45448 \begin_inset Index idx
45451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45452 Customization ! of menus
45460 \begin_layout Standard
45461 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
45462 interface (ui) file.
45463 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
45471 \begin_layout Description
45476 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
45479 \begin_layout Description
45486 the menu entries in popup context menus
45489 \begin_layout Description
45494 specifies the toolbar buttons
45497 \begin_layout Standard
45498 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
45499 and edit the entries.
45502 \begin_layout Standard
45503 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
45515 entries must be finished with an explicit
45540 and in the case of the
45541 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45545 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45553 The syntax for the entries is:
45556 \begin_layout Standard
45557 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45563 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45571 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45575 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45580 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45586 \begin_layout Standard
45588 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45591 All the \SpecialChar LyX
45592 -functions are listed in the menu
45594 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
45596 \begin_inset space ~
45604 \begin_layout Standard
45605 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
45611 \begin_layout Standard
45612 For example, assuming you use the menu
45614 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
45617 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
45621 \begin_layout Standard
45622 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45628 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45632 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45636 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45640 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45646 \begin_layout Standard
45648 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45652 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45656 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45663 to have the sixth bookmark.
45666 \begin_layout Standard
45670 \begin_inset space ~
45675 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
45676 's toolbar buttons.
45677 The currently available icon sets are compared in
45678 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45681 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
45689 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45693 \begin_layout Standard
45696 Enable tool tips in main work area
45698 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
45702 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45706 \begin_layout Standard
45711 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
45712 should display in the menu
45714 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
45716 \begin_inset space ~
45724 \begin_layout Subsection
45728 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45732 \begin_layout Standard
45735 Restore window layouts and geometries
45738 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
45739 the last \SpecialChar LyX
45743 \begin_layout Standard
45746 Restore cursor positions
45748 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
45752 \begin_layout Standard
45755 Load opened files from last session
45757 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
45761 \begin_layout Standard
45764 Clear all session information
45766 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
45767 sessions (cursor positions, names
45768 of last opened documents, etc.).
45771 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45773 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45775 name "subsec:Backup documents"
45780 \begin_inset Index idx
45783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45792 \begin_layout Standard
45795 Backup original documents when saving
45797 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
45798 it was saved the last time.
45799 It is stored in the
45802 \begin_inset space ~
45808 \begin_inset space ~
45812 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45814 reference "sec:Paths"
45818 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
45821 \begin_inset space ~
45827 The backup file has the file extension
45828 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45836 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45842 \begin_layout Standard
45845 Backup documents, every
45847 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
45850 \begin_layout Standard
45853 Save documents compressed by default
45855 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
45856 \begin_inset space ~
45860 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45862 reference "subsec:Compressed"
45867 This applies to newly created documents only.
45868 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
45871 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45872 Windows & work area
45875 \begin_layout Standard
45878 Open documents in tabs
45880 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
45884 \begin_layout Standard
45889 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
45894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45896 \begin_inset space ~
45900 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45902 reference "sec:Paths"
45906 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
45913 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
45914 documents will be opened in the same running instance
45915 of \SpecialChar LyX
45917 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
45918 instance is created for each file.
45921 \begin_layout Standard
45924 Single close-tab button
45926 is checked, there will only be one close button (
45936 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
45937 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
45938 Regardless of this option, one can always close a tab by middle-clicking
45942 \begin_layout Standard
45943 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
45946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45951 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
45952 before the change takes effect.
45960 \begin_layout Standard
45965 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
45967 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
45969 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
45973 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
45974 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
45975 and only want to close the view in once instance.
45978 \begin_layout Subsection
45980 \begin_inset Index idx
45983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45990 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45992 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
45999 \begin_layout Standard
46000 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
46004 \begin_layout Standard
46005 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
46008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46013 This section only deals with the fonts
46017 the \SpecialChar LyX
46019 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
46022 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46023 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
46034 \begin_layout Standard
46035 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
46052 (depends on the system) as its
46055 \begin_inset space ~
46071 \begin_layout Standard
46072 You can change the font size with the
46079 \begin_layout Standard
46084 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
46086 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46089 points have the size of 1
46090 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46094 \begin_inset space ~
46098 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46100 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
46105 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
46106 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46110 The sizes are explained in detail in section
46111 \begin_inset space ~
46115 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46117 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
46124 \begin_layout Standard
46127 Use pixmap cache to speed up font rendering
46129 enabled, \SpecialChar LyX
46130 needs to redraw the screen less often.
46131 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
46132 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
46133 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
46135 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
46136 \begin_inset space ~
46142 \begin_layout Subsection
46144 \begin_inset Index idx
46147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46148 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
46155 \begin_inset Index idx
46158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46167 \begin_layout Standard
46168 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
46169 by choosing an item in the
46170 list and selecting the
46177 \begin_layout Standard
46178 By checking the option
46182 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
46185 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
46186 \begin_inset space ~
46190 \begin_inset space ~
46195 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
46198 \begin_layout Subsection
46200 \begin_inset Index idx
46203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46212 \begin_layout Standard
46213 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
46217 \begin_layout Standard
46222 enables previewing snippets of your document.
46223 This feature is described in section
46224 \begin_inset space ~
46228 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46230 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
46237 \begin_layout Standard
46238 Checking the option
46241 \begin_inset space ~
46245 \begin_inset space ~
46249 \begin_inset space ~
46254 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
46257 \begin_layout Section
46259 \begin_inset Index idx
46262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46271 \begin_layout Subsection
46275 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46279 \begin_layout Standard
46282 Cursor follows scrollbar
46284 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
46288 \begin_layout Standard
46289 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
46290 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
46291 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
46294 \begin_layout Standard
46297 Scroll below end of document
46299 is self-explanatory.
46302 \begin_layout Standard
46303 In \SpecialChar LyX
46304 one can jump from word to word by pressing
46311 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
46313 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
46314 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
46317 \begin_layout Standard
46320 Sort environments alphabetically
46322 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
46325 \begin_layout Standard
46328 Group environments by their category
46330 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
46333 \begin_layout Standard
46338 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
46349 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46353 \begin_layout Standard
46354 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
46359 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
46360 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
46364 \begin_layout Subsection
46366 \begin_inset Index idx
46369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46376 \begin_inset Index idx
46379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46380 Settings ! Shortcuts
46388 \begin_layout Standard
46393 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
46395 Several binding files are available, among them:
46398 \begin_layout Description
46399 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
46402 \begin_layout Description
46403 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
46415 \begin_layout Description
46416 mac.bind a set of bindings for
46419 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46427 \begin_layout Standard
46428 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
46433 , and binding files for special languages.
46434 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
46435 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46439 \begin_inset space \space{}
46443 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46447 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46451 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
46452 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
46453 will try to use the appropriate binding
46457 \begin_layout Standard
46458 Some binding files, like
46462 , only have a limited scope.
46463 When looking at the end of the file
46467 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
46470 \begin_layout Standard
46474 \begin_inset space ~
46478 \begin_inset space ~
46483 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
46484 in the selected key binding file.
46487 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46489 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46491 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
46496 \begin_inset Index idx
46499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46500 Key Bindings ! Editing
46508 \begin_layout Standard
46509 To add new or modify existing key bindings to your own taste you can use
46510 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
46511 functions and the bound shortcuts.
46512 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
46515 Show key-bindings containing
46518 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
46519 Insert there for example as keyword
46520 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46524 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46527 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
46528 functions that contain
46529 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46533 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46537 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
46538 All \SpecialChar LyX
46539 functions are also listed in the file
46544 that you will find in the
46551 \begin_layout Standard
46552 For example, to add the shortcut
46560 , select the function and press the
46565 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
46566 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
46569 \begin_layout Standard
46570 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
46571 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
46573 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
46574 function names as a semicolon separated list.
46576 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
46581 \begin_layout Standard
46582 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
46585 \begin_layout Standard
46586 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
46588 The syntax of the entries is:
46591 \begin_layout Standard
46597 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46601 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46605 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46610 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46616 \begin_layout Standard
46617 Note, though, that the key combination definition uses a specific syntax.
46618 This applies to the designators of specific modifier keys (e.
46619 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46646 , respectively) as well as to the other keys.
46647 Note particularly that you cannot use non-alphanumeric characters directly
46648 in the definition of the key combination, but must use commands following
46649 the Xlib standard instead (please refer to the existing bind files for
46651 So if you wanted to bind a command to the key combination
46655 , you needed to specify it as
46660 If you use the dialog to edit key bindings, you don't have to care for
46663 transforms your input to the correct syntax.
46666 \begin_layout Subsection
46668 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46670 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
46675 \begin_inset Index idx
46678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46685 \begin_inset Index idx
46688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46689 Settings ! Keyboard Map
46697 \begin_layout Standard
46698 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
46699 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
46700 provides keyboard maps.
46701 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
46702 is a Romanian one, you can enable
46705 \begin_inset space ~
46709 \begin_inset space ~
46714 and select the keyboard map file named
46721 \begin_layout Standard
46730 keyboard map and, if you use the
46734 bindings, you can select the first and second with
46737 arg "keymap-primary"
46743 arg "keymap-secondary"
46746 respectively or toggle between them with
46749 arg "keymap-toggle"
46755 \begin_layout Standard
46756 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
46759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46764 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
46773 \begin_layout Standard
46774 You can also specify the mouse
46776 Wheel scrolling speed
46779 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
46783 Middle mouse button pasting
46785 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel)
46786 inserts the content of the clipboard.
46789 \begin_layout Standard
46797 \begin_inset space ~
46801 \begin_inset space ~
46806 you can select a key for zooming.
46807 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
46810 \begin_layout Subsection
46814 \begin_layout Standard
46815 Input completion is described in section
46816 \begin_inset space ~
46820 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46822 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
46829 \begin_layout Section
46831 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46838 \begin_inset Index idx
46841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46848 \begin_inset Index idx
46851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46860 \begin_layout Standard
46861 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
46862 are normally determined during
46864 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
46867 \begin_layout Description
46869 \begin_inset space ~
46872 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
46873 's working directory.
46874 It is the default when you
46885 \begin_inset space ~
46893 \begin_layout Description
46895 \begin_inset space ~
46898 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
46900 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
46902 \begin_inset space ~
46906 \begin_inset space ~
46914 \begin_layout Description
46916 \begin_inset space ~
46919 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
46925 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
46929 \begin_inset Newline newline
46933 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
46936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46945 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
46946 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
46954 \begin_layout Description
46956 \begin_inset space ~
46960 \begin_inset Index idx
46963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46969 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
46970 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
46971 \begin_inset space ~
46975 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46977 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
46985 will be used to save the backups.
46986 \begin_inset Newline newline
46989 Backup files have the ending
46990 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46994 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47000 \begin_layout Description
47002 \begin_inset space ~
47005 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
47006 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
47008 \begin_inset Newline newline
47015 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
47021 You can edit this file with the program
47030 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
47031 in its preferences under
47034 \begin_inset space ~
47040 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
47045 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
47047 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
47048 in your \SpecialChar LyX
47054 and \SpecialChar LyX
47055 need to be running the same time.
47056 \begin_inset Newline newline
47059 The pipe is also used for the
47063 feature, see section
47064 \begin_inset space ~
47068 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47070 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
47075 \begin_inset Newline newline
47078 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
47079 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
47080 \begin_inset Newline newline
47096 \begin_layout Description
47098 \begin_inset space ~
47101 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
47104 \begin_layout Description
47106 \begin_inset space ~
47109 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
47110 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
47111 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
47114 \begin_layout Description
47116 \begin_inset space ~
47119 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
47125 You only need to specify it if you are using
47129 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
47131 For \SpecialChar LyX
47136 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
47140 \begin_layout Description
47142 \begin_inset space ~
47145 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
47146 When \SpecialChar LyX
47147 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
47148 to find it on the system.
47149 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
47151 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
47153 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47157 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47160 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
47161 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
47164 \begin_layout Description
47166 \begin_inset space ~
47169 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
47170 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
47171 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
47172 code or in the document
47174 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
47176 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
47177 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
47178 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
47179 scanned for the input files.
47180 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
47181 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
47183 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths; otherwise
47184 compilation may fail for some documents.
47187 \begin_layout Section
47191 \begin_layout Standard
47192 Here you can insert your
47201 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
47203 \begin_inset space ~
47207 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47209 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
47213 , to mark changes you make as yours.
47216 \begin_layout Section
47218 \begin_inset Index idx
47221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47222 Language ! Settings
47228 \begin_inset Index idx
47231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47232 Settings ! Language
47240 \begin_layout Subsection
47242 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47244 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
47251 \begin_layout Description
47253 \begin_inset space ~
47257 \begin_inset space ~
47260 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
47262 You can find its actual translation status here:
47263 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47265 target "https://www.lyx.org/I18n"
47273 \begin_layout Description
47275 \begin_inset space ~
47278 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
47279 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
47280 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
47281 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
47282 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47286 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47290 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47294 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47298 The most widespread language package is
47303 \begin_inset Index idx
47306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47313 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
47315 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
47316 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
47317 come with the alternative
47323 \begin_inset Index idx
47326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47328 packages ! polyglossia
47333 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
47334 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
47340 The available selections are described in section
47341 \begin_inset space ~
47345 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47347 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
47354 \begin_layout Description
47356 \begin_inset space ~
47359 start If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
47360 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
47361 you can here specify the command to start the package.
47362 An example is the start command
47368 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
47370 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
47374 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
47390 selectlanguage{$$lang}
47395 \begin_layout Description
47397 \begin_inset space ~
47405 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
47406 command toggles the package on and off.
47409 \begin_layout Description
47411 \begin_inset space ~
47415 \begin_inset space ~
47418 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
47422 \begin_layout Description
47424 \begin_inset space ~
47428 \begin_inset space ~
47431 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
47435 \begin_layout Description
47437 \begin_inset space ~
47441 \begin_inset space ~
47444 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
47445 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
47446 used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
47448 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
47455 \begin_layout Description
47457 \begin_inset space ~
47460 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
47462 When this option is not set, the
47465 \begin_inset space ~
47470 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47472 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
47475 \begin_inset space ~
47483 \begin_layout Description
47485 \begin_inset space ~
47491 \begin_inset space ~
47497 When it is not set, the
47500 \begin_inset space ~
47505 is set to the end of the document.
47508 \begin_layout Description
47510 \begin_inset space ~
47514 \begin_inset space ~
47517 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
47518 language will be underlined in blue.
47521 \begin_layout Description
47523 \begin_inset space ~
47527 \begin_inset space ~
47530 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
47531 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
47534 \begin_layout Description
47536 \begin_inset space ~
47539 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
47540 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
47541 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
47542 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
47545 \begin_layout Subsection
47549 \begin_layout Standard
47550 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
47551 \begin_inset space ~
47555 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47557 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
47564 \begin_layout Section
47568 \begin_layout Subsection
47570 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47572 name "subsec:General-output"
47579 \begin_layout Description
47581 \begin_inset space ~
47584 search Commands that will be used for the menu
47586 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
47588 \begin_inset space ~
47594 For a detailed description see section
47596 Reverse DVI/PDF search
47601 \begin_inset space ~
47609 \begin_layout Description
47611 \begin_inset space ~
47614 Options Options for the program
47618 that is used for the export format
47623 \begin_inset space ~
47627 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47629 reference "subsec:Export"
47634 Possible options are listed in the
47639 \begin_inset Newline newline
47643 \begin_inset Flex URL
47646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47648 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
47658 \begin_layout Description
47660 \begin_inset space ~
47664 \begin_inset space ~
47667 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
47670 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
47671 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
47673 \begin_inset space ~
47679 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
47682 \begin_layout Description
47684 \begin_inset space ~
47688 \begin_inset Index idx
47691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47698 \begin_inset Index idx
47701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47702 Settings ! Date format
47707 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
47708 \begin_inset Newline newline
47712 \begin_inset Flex URL
47715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47717 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
47723 \begin_inset Newline newline
47726 For example the format
47727 \begin_inset Newline newline
47731 \begin_inset Newline newline
47734 prints the date as day/month/year.
47737 \begin_layout Description
47739 \begin_inset space ~
47743 \begin_inset space ~
47746 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
47747 is allowed to overwrite on export.
47750 \begin_layout Subsection
47756 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47758 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
47763 \begin_inset Index idx
47766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47767 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
47776 \begin_layout Description
47778 \begin_inset space ~
47786 \begin_inset space ~
47790 \begin_inset space ~
47793 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
47798 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
47819 are used for Cyrillic.
47820 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
47821 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47829 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47833 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
47835 sets up in the background.
47836 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
47839 \begin_layout Description
47841 \begin_inset space ~
47845 \begin_inset space ~
47849 \begin_inset space ~
47853 \begin_inset space ~
47856 options They only have an effect when the program
47860 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
47863 \begin_layout Standard
47864 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
47865 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
47866 manuals of the applications.
47869 \begin_layout Description
47871 \begin_inset space ~
47874 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
47875 \begin_inset space ~
47879 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47881 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
47888 \begin_layout Description
47890 \begin_inset space ~
47893 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
47894 \begin_inset space ~
47898 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47900 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
47907 \begin_layout Description
47909 \begin_inset space ~
47912 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
47913 \begin_inset space ~
47917 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47919 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
47926 \begin_layout Description
47932 \begin_inset space ~
47935 command Command for the program
47937 Check\SpecialChar TeX
47940 that is described in the section
47942 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
47947 Additional Features
47952 \begin_layout Standard
47953 There are additionally the following options:
47956 \begin_layout Description
47958 \begin_inset space ~
47962 \begin_inset space ~
47966 \begin_inset space ~
47970 \begin_inset space ~
47975 \begin_inset space ~
47978 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
47979 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47985 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47989 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47993 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47996 to separate folders.
47997 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
47999 \begin_inset Index idx
48002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48009 \begin_inset Index idx
48012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48021 \begin_layout Description
48023 \begin_inset space ~
48027 \begin_inset space ~
48031 \begin_inset space ~
48035 \begin_inset space ~
48039 \begin_inset space ~
48043 \begin_inset space ~
48046 changes Removes all manually set
48052 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
48053 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
48055 \begin_inset space ~
48060 dialog when changing the document class.
48063 \begin_layout Section
48065 \begin_inset space ~
48069 \begin_inset Index idx
48072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48081 \begin_layout Subsection
48083 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48085 name "subsec:Converters"
48090 \begin_inset Index idx
48093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48102 \begin_layout Standard
48103 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
48104 from one format to another.
48105 You can modify converters or create new ones.
48106 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
48113 \begin_inset space ~
48118 field and press the
48123 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
48127 \begin_inset space ~
48132 drop-down list, modify the
48136 field and press the
48143 \begin_layout Standard
48146 Converter File Cache
48152 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
48154 Maximum Age (in days
48157 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
48158 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
48161 \begin_layout Standard
48162 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
48163 definition, is described in the section
48174 \begin_layout Subsection
48176 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48178 name "sec:File-Formats"
48183 \begin_inset Index idx
48186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48193 \begin_inset Index idx
48196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48205 \begin_layout Standard
48206 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
48216 programs that should be used for certain formats.
48219 \begin_layout Standard
48220 You can also define the
48222 Default output format
48224 that is used when you use
48226 View, Update, View Master Document
48230 Update Master Document
48236 menu or the toolbar.
48239 \begin_layout Standard
48240 More about formats and their options is described in the section
48251 \begin_layout Standard
48252 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
48254 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
48255 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
48256 This is done by specifying a
48261 More about this is described in the section
48272 \begin_layout Chapter
48273 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
48275 \begin_inset Index idx
48278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48285 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48287 name "chap:Units-available-in"
48294 \begin_layout Standard
48296 \begin_inset space ~
48300 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48302 reference "tab:Units"
48306 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
48307 and used in this documentation.
48310 \begin_layout Standard
48311 \begin_inset Float table
48317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48318 \begin_inset Caption Standard
48320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48321 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48336 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
48342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48344 \begin_inset Tabular
48345 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="21" columns="3">
48346 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
48347 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
48348 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle" width="50col%">
48349 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
48351 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48369 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48381 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48390 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48395 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48399 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48407 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48418 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48427 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48432 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48436 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48444 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48455 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48464 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48473 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48484 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48493 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48498 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48502 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
48506 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48514 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48525 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48534 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48547 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48558 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48567 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48580 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48600 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48609 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48620 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48629 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48638 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48649 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48658 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48663 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48667 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48675 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48686 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48695 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48700 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48704 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48712 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48723 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48732 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48737 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48741 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48749 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48760 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48769 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48773 scaled point (65536
48774 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48778 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48786 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48797 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48806 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48815 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48828 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48837 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48841 % of height between baselines of two subsequent text lines
48846 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48859 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48868 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48877 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48890 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48899 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48908 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48921 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48930 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48939 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48961 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48965 % of original image width
48970 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48981 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48990 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48999 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49012 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49021 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49030 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49054 \begin_layout Standard
49055 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
49058 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
49065 \begin_layout Bibliography
49066 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49067 LatexCommand bibitem
49074 The \SpecialChar LyX
49076 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49079 target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits"
49085 \begin_inset Newline newline
49089 \begin_inset Flex URL
49092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49094 https://www.lyx.org/Credits
49102 \begin_layout Bibliography
49103 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49104 LatexCommand bibitem
49105 key "latexcompanion"
49110 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
49112 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
49113 Companion Second Edition.
49116 Addison-Wesley, 2004
49119 \begin_layout Bibliography
49120 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49121 LatexCommand bibitem
49127 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
49130 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
49134 Addison-Wesley, 2003
49137 \begin_layout Bibliography
49138 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49139 LatexCommand bibitem
49148 : A Document Preparation System.
49151 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
49154 \begin_layout Bibliography
49155 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49156 LatexCommand bibitem
49166 The \SpecialChar TeX
49170 Addison-Wesley, 1984
49173 \begin_layout Bibliography
49174 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49175 LatexCommand bibitem
49181 The \SpecialChar TeX
49183 \begin_inset Newline newline
49187 \begin_inset Flex URL
49190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49192 http://texcatalogue.ctan.org/bytopic.html
49200 \begin_layout Bibliography
49201 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49202 LatexCommand bibitem
49208 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
49210 \begin_inset Newline newline
49214 \begin_inset Flex URL
49217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49219 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
49227 \begin_layout Bibliography
49228 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49229 LatexCommand bibitem
49236 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49238 name "Documentation"
49239 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
49246 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
49250 \begin_inset Newline newline
49254 \begin_inset Flex URL
49257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49259 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
49267 \begin_layout Bibliography
49268 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49269 LatexCommand bibitem
49276 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49278 name "Documentation"
49279 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
49284 how to use the program
49286 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
49290 \begin_inset Newline newline
49294 \begin_inset Flex URL
49297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49299 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
49307 \begin_layout Bibliography
49308 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49309 LatexCommand bibitem
49316 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49318 name "Documentation"
49319 target "http://www.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf"
49324 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49330 \begin_inset Index idx
49333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49335 packages ! biblatex
49341 \begin_inset Newline newline
49345 \begin_inset Flex URL
49348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49350 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf
49358 \begin_layout Bibliography
49359 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49360 LatexCommand bibitem
49367 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49369 name "Documentation"
49370 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf"
49375 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49381 \begin_inset Index idx
49384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49392 \begin_inset Newline newline
49396 \begin_inset Flex URL
49399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49401 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf
49409 \begin_layout Bibliography
49410 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49411 LatexCommand bibitem
49418 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49420 name "Documentation"
49421 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
49431 \begin_inset Newline newline
49435 \begin_inset Flex URL
49438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49440 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
49448 \begin_layout Bibliography
49449 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49450 LatexCommand bibitem
49451 key "makeindex-man"
49457 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49460 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
49470 \begin_inset Newline newline
49474 \begin_inset Flex URL
49477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49479 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
49487 \begin_layout Bibliography
49488 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49489 LatexCommand bibitem
49496 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49498 name "Documentation"
49499 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
49509 \begin_inset Newline newline
49513 \begin_inset Flex URL
49516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49518 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
49526 \begin_layout Bibliography
49527 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49528 LatexCommand bibitem
49535 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49537 name "Documentation"
49538 target "http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
49543 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
49545 \begin_inset Newline newline
49549 \begin_inset Flex URL
49552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49554 https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
49562 \begin_layout Bibliography
49563 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49564 LatexCommand bibitem
49571 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49573 name "Documentation"
49574 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
49579 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49585 \begin_inset Index idx
49588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49596 \begin_inset Newline newline
49600 \begin_inset Flex URL
49603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49605 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
49613 \begin_layout Bibliography
49614 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49615 LatexCommand bibitem
49622 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49624 name "Documentation"
49625 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
49630 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49636 \begin_inset Index idx
49639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49641 packages ! enumitem
49647 \begin_inset Newline newline
49651 \begin_inset Flex URL
49654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49656 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
49664 \begin_layout Bibliography
49665 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49666 LatexCommand bibitem
49673 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49675 name "Documentation"
49676 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
49681 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49687 \begin_inset Index idx
49690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49692 packages ! fancyhdr
49698 \begin_inset Newline newline
49702 \begin_inset Flex URL
49705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49707 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
49715 \begin_layout Bibliography
49716 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49717 LatexCommand bibitem
49724 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49726 name "Documentation"
49727 target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref"
49732 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49738 \begin_inset Index idx
49741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49743 packages ! hyperref
49749 \begin_inset Newline newline
49753 \begin_inset Flex URL
49756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49758 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf
49766 \begin_layout Bibliography
49767 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49768 LatexCommand bibitem
49775 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49777 name "Documentation"
49778 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf"
49783 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49789 \begin_inset Index idx
49792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49794 packages ! microtpye
49800 \begin_inset Newline newline
49804 \begin_inset Flex URL
49807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49809 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf
49817 \begin_layout Bibliography
49818 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49819 LatexCommand bibitem
49826 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49828 name "Documentation"
49829 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
49834 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49840 \begin_inset Index idx
49843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49851 \begin_inset Newline newline
49855 \begin_inset Flex URL
49858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49860 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
49868 \begin_layout Bibliography
49869 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49870 LatexCommand bibitem
49877 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49879 name "Documentation"
49880 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
49885 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49891 \begin_inset Index idx
49894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49896 packages ! prettyref
49902 \begin_inset Newline newline
49906 \begin_inset Flex URL
49909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49911 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
49919 \begin_layout Bibliography
49920 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49921 LatexCommand bibitem
49928 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49930 name "Documentation"
49931 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
49936 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49942 \begin_inset Index idx
49945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49947 packages ! refstyle
49953 \begin_inset Newline newline
49957 \begin_inset Flex URL
49960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49962 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
49970 \begin_layout Bibliography
49971 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49972 LatexCommand bibitem
49979 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49982 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
49987 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
49989 \begin_inset Newline newline
49993 \begin_inset Flex URL
49996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49998 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
50006 \begin_layout Bibliography
50007 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50008 LatexCommand bibitem
50015 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50018 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
50023 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50025 \begin_inset Newline newline
50029 \begin_inset Flex URL
50032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50034 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
50042 \begin_layout Bibliography
50043 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50044 LatexCommand bibitem
50051 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50054 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
50059 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50060 for Cyrillic languages:
50061 \begin_inset Newline newline
50065 \begin_inset Flex URL
50068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50070 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
50078 \begin_layout Bibliography
50079 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50080 LatexCommand bibitem
50087 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50090 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
50095 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50097 \begin_inset Newline newline
50101 \begin_inset Flex URL
50104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50106 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
50114 \begin_layout Bibliography
50115 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50116 LatexCommand bibitem
50123 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50126 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
50131 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50133 \begin_inset Newline newline
50137 \begin_inset Flex URL
50140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50142 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
50150 \begin_layout Bibliography
50151 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50152 LatexCommand bibitem
50159 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50162 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
50167 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50169 \begin_inset Newline newline
50173 \begin_inset Flex URL
50176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50178 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
50186 \begin_layout Standard
50187 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
50194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50221 \begin_inset Note Note
50224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50231 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
50232 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
50233 bibliography is the second one:
50241 \begin_layout Standard
50242 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
50243 LatexCommand bibtex
50244 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
50245 options "biblio/alphadin"
50252 \begin_layout Standard
50253 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
50257 \begin_layout Standard
50261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50267 pagedeclaration}[1]{
50270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50276 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
50284 \begin_inset Note Note
50287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50288 This command makes the page number a clickable hyperlink, see sec.
50289 \begin_inset space ~
50293 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50295 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
50307 \begin_layout Standard
50308 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
50309 LatexCommand printnomenclature
50315 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
50316 LatexCommand printindex